You are on page 1of 310

Muratec

MFX-1350/F-305
FACSIMILE SYSTEM
FIELD ENGINEERING MANUAL

MAI version 1.0 MEUK version 1.0
(January 10, 2008)

MURATA MACHINERY, LTD
COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT DIV.
DA7-91170-60

Safety Information
LED Safety Label
A LED safety label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.

Battery Precautions
CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Important: Muratec does not recommend the independent replacement of this battery. The battery is sold only as a component part of the main control PCB and Battery PCB, and cannot be purchased separately from Muratec.

Table of Contents
Section 1 General Description ................................................ 1-1
1.1 Product Description ..............................................................................................................................1-1 1.2 Specifications........................................................................................................................................1-2

Section2 Machine Composition.............................................. 2-1
2.1 Interconnect Block Diagram (1/2) .........................................................................................................2-1 2.2 Main Control PCB .................................................................................................................................2-3 2.3 Network Control Unit (NCU) PCB.........................................................................................................2-4 2.4 Power Supply Unit (PSU) .....................................................................................................................2-5 2.5 Sensors.................................................................................................................................................2-6 2.5.1 Sensor Locations...........................................................................................................................2-6 2.5.2 Sensor Descriptions ......................................................................................................................2-7 2.6 Document Scanning Sequence ............................................................................................................2-8 2.6.1 ADF Detection ...............................................................................................................................2-8 2.6.2 FBS section (MFX-1350 only) .......................................................................................................2-9 2.7 Recording Section ..............................................................................................................................2-11 2.7.1 Recording Paper Feed Path........................................................................................................2-11 2.8 Image Processing ...............................................................................................................................2-12 2.8.1 Drum Charge...............................................................................................................................2-12 2.8.2 Drum Exposure ...........................................................................................................................2-12 2.8.3 Development ...............................................................................................................................2-13 2.8.4 Image Transfer ............................................................................................................................2-13 2.8.5 Erasing ........................................................................................................................................2-14 2.8.6 Cleaning ......................................................................................................................................2-14 2.8.7 Fusing..........................................................................................................................................2-15

Section3 Adjustment Procedures........................................... 3-1
3.1 Field Service Program Modes ..............................................................................................................3-1 3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment ...........................................................................................................3-3 3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters ...................................................................................................3-3 3.2.2 Clearing the Machine Parameters.................................................................................................3-3 3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment ................................................................................................................3-60 3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches......................................................................................................3-60 3.3.2 Clearing the Memory Switches....................................................................................................3-60 3.4 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings ............................................................................................3-83 3.5 All RAM Clear .....................................................................................................................................3-84 3.6 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes ...............................................................................................3-84 3.7 Unique Switch Adjustment..................................................................................................................3-89 3.7.1 Setting the Unique Switches .......................................................................................................3-89 3.7.2 Clearing the Unique Switches .....................................................................................................3-89 3.8 T.30 Monitor.....................................................................................................................................3-110 3.8.1 Print T.30 Monitor ......................................................................................................................3-110 3.8.2 Multi T.30 Monitor......................................................................................................................3-110 3.8.3 How to see the print out ............................................................................................................3-111 3.9 Printer maintenance mode................................................................................................................3-115 3.10 Service Report Printing...................................................................................................................3-116 3.10.1 Printing the service report .......................................................................................................3-116 3.10.2 Contents of the service report .................................................................................................3-116 3.11 Monitor speaker ..............................................................................................................................3-126 3.12 Test Modes .....................................................................................................................................3-126 3.12.1 Life Monitor..............................................................................................................................3-127 3.12.2 Printer Test..............................................................................................................................3-128 3.12.3 Feeder test ..............................................................................................................................3-129 3.12.4 Port Status...............................................................................................................................3-129 3.12.5 Set Background Level .............................................................................................................3-129 i

3.13 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and Unique Switch Settings ......................................3-130 3.14 Factory Functions ...........................................................................................................................3-130 3.14.1 Function List ............................................................................................................................3-130 3.14.2 LED Test .................................................................................................................................3-130 3.14.3 LCD Test .................................................................................................................................3-131 3.14.4 Key Panel Test ........................................................................................................................3-131 3.14.5 SRAM Check...........................................................................................................................3-132 3.14.6 DRAM Check...........................................................................................................................3-132 3.14.7 RTC (real time clock) Test.......................................................................................................3-133 3.14.8 Page memory check................................................................................................................3-133 3.14.9 Generate bell test ....................................................................................................................3-133 3.15 Line Tests .......................................................................................................................................3-134 3.15.1 Relay Test ...............................................................................................................................3-134 3.15.2 Tonal Signal Test ....................................................................................................................3-134 3.15.3 DTMF Output Test...................................................................................................................3-136 3.16 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode .......................................................................................................3-137 3.17 Consumable order sheet ................................................................................................................3-138 3.17.1 Set consumable order sheet ...................................................................................................3-139 3.17.2 Clear consumable order sheet ................................................................................................3-140 3.17.3 Print consumable order sheet .................................................................................................3-140 3.18 DRAM Clear....................................................................................................................................3-141 3.19 Clear Life Monitor ...........................................................................................................................3-141 3.20 Clear Optional Data ........................................................................................................................3-142 3.21 Set Service Code............................................................................................................................3-142 3.22 Life monitor maintenance ...............................................................................................................3-143 3.23 Sensor input test.............................................................................................................................3-144 3.24 Printer diagnostic mode ..................................................................................................................3-145 3.25 Network service mode ....................................................................................................................3-145 3.25.1 Display the server sum-check .................................................................................................3-145 3.25.2 Clear the Administrator’s information ......................................................................................3-145 3.25.3 All clear the registered parameters of the network board........................................................3-145 3.26 Multi Line Settings ..........................................................................................................................3-146 3.27 Flash Rom Sum Check...................................................................................................................3-147 3.28 Set Service Report..........................................................................................................................3-148 3.28.1 Set the service report ..............................................................................................................3-148 3.28.2 Clear service report .................................................................................................................3-149 3.28.3 Printing the service report .......................................................................................................3-149 3.29 Printer registration adjustment........................................................................................................3-150 3.30 Quick Initial settings........................................................................................................................3-151 3.31 Update the software........................................................................................................................3-152 3.31.1 Install the update application on PC ........................................................................................3-152 3.31.2 Installing the USB driver on the PC.........................................................................................3-153 3.31.3 Updating the software using the PC........................................................................................3-156 Error code...........................................................................................................................................3-158 3.32 Convert dialing characters in e–mail gateway functions.................................................................3-159

Section4 Troubleshooting Procedures .................................. 4-1
4.1 Troubleshooting Outline........................................................................................................................4-1 4.2 Recording Paper Jam ...........................................................................................................................4-2 4.3 Document Feeder Jam .........................................................................................................................4-2 4.4 Document Feeder Multi-feeding or Skew .............................................................................................4-3 4.5 Mirror Carriage Error (MFX-1350) ........................................................................................................4-3 4.6 Transmit Error.......................................................................................................................................4-3 4.7 Transmit Black Lines ............................................................................................................................4-3 4.8 Cannot transmit ....................................................................................................................................4-4 4.9 Receive Errors ......................................................................................................................................4-4 4.10 Will not Auto-Answer ..........................................................................................................................4-4 4.11 Clearing Jammed Paper .....................................................................................................................4-5 ii

If the original document jams .................................................................................................................4-5 To remove the document: ......................................................................................................................4-6 If a printout jams inside your machine....................................................................................................4-8 4.12. The Image Quality Problems ...........................................................................................................4-11 4.12.1 Blank pages...............................................................................................................................4-11 4.12.2 Black pages...............................................................................................................................4-11 4.12.3 Printout too light.........................................................................................................................4-12 4.12.4 Printout too dark ........................................................................................................................4-12 4.12.5 Blurred background ...................................................................................................................4-12 4.12.6 Uneven print density..................................................................................................................4-13 4.12.7 Irregularities...............................................................................................................................4-13 4.12.8 White (Black) Line .....................................................................................................................4-14 4.12.9 Toner Smudges.........................................................................................................................4-14 4.13 LCD Error Messages ........................................................................................................................4-15 LCD error messages (Alphabetic list)...................................................................................................4-15 4.14 Error Codes ......................................................................................................................................4-19 Dialing errors ........................................................................................................................................4-19 Reception errors...................................................................................................................................4-19 Transmission errors..............................................................................................................................4-20 Communication Error Messages ..........................................................................................................4-21 4.15 Service Call Error..............................................................................................................................4-22 4.15.1 Call For Service.........................................................................................................................4-22 4.15.2 Please Call Service ...................................................................................................................4-22 4.16 LCD Failure.......................................................................................................................................4-25 4.17 General Power Failure......................................................................................................................4-25 4.18 Cleaning the Unit ..............................................................................................................................4-26 Curing frequent jams in the ADF ..........................................................................................................4-26 Cleaning the Document glass, ADF glass and Document pad ............................................................4-27 Cleaning the drum chare wire and LED print head ..............................................................................4-27

Section5 Maintenance & Adjustment ..................................... 5-1
5.1 Maintenance schedule..........................................................................................................................5-2 5.2 Re/Disassemble....................................................................................................................................5-3 5.2.1 COVERS .......................................................................................................................................5-5 5.2.2 PCBS...........................................................................................................................................5-15 5.2.3 SCANNING SECTION ................................................................................................................5-24 5.2.4 PRINTER SECTION....................................................................................................................5-42 5.3 Adjustment..........................................................................................................................................5-69 5.3.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment ....................................................................................5-69 5.3.2 Printer registration mode .............................................................................................................5-69 5.3.3 Zoom adjustment.........................................................................................................................5-72 5.3.4 Registration .................................................................................................................................5-76 5.3.5 Separation Pressure adjustment .................................................................................................5-80 5.3.6 Cleaning the Mirror A, B and C ...................................................................................................5-81 5.3.7 Applying the Sheet Document Press (MFX-1350 only)...............................................................5-82

Section 6 Options .................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Memory Upgrade ..................................................................................................................................6-1 6.2 Second paper cassette.........................................................................................................................6-3 6.3 Page Counter........................................................................................................................................6-5 6.4 PCL printer controller............................................................................................................................6-7 6.5 Network interface board .......................................................................................................................6-8 6.6 Second phone line kit .........................................................................................................................6-12 6.7 OfficeBridge Expansion kit..................................................................................................................6-15

iii

Section 1 General Description
1.1 Product Description
The MFX-1350 and F-305 are Multi-function products with flat bed scanner (MFX-1350) and Group 3 and Super G3 modem facsimile machine. Documents are printed on plain paper using dry electrophotographic printing.
Automatic Document Feeder Document Guides Document Tray Document Exit Tray

Control Panel

Bypass Tray

Paper Cassette

2nd Paper Cassette (Option) Front Cover Paper Level Indicator

2nd Side Cover 1st Side Cover

Platen Cover

Telephone Connectors
PHON E1 PHON E2 LINE

Document Glass

Second phone line kit (Option) USB Connector Network Connector (Option)

Paper Exit Tray
PHON E1 PHON E2 LINE

AC Power Jack Power Switch

Note: F-305 has no document glass.

1-1

15 mm 0. (Fax). 14400.5 (W) × 35. Half-letterA4.12 mm <FBS glass> — Max: 216mm (W) × 356 (L) Min: No limit Letter. 210 mm (Copy) for A4 Under 3 seconds (Super G3) Based on transmission of ITU-T Test Document 1 to a Muratec fax machine. 24000.5 in. and the grayscale resolution is “203 × 196”. German. ITU-T T.2 Specifications Item Type Telephone network Compatibility Coding method Modem speed Dual Access LCD MFX-1350 F-305 Desktop type PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) or equivalent. MMR and JBIG 33600. Legal. 9600. (Copy) for Letter European models: 208 mm (Fax).4 (L) inches 8.5 (W) × 14.) <Transmission> horizontal × vertical (in dots/inch × in lines/inch) Normal: 203 × 98 Fine: 203 × 196 Super fine: 406 × 392* or 600dpi × 600lpi Grayscale: 203 × 196 *: In the case that the remote fax has the ability of “406 × 392”. Spanish European models: English. 28800. Standard: 8 MB (650 pages) Upgrade option: plus 32MB (2720 pages) (Total memory capacity: Backup time) 8 MB: 72 hour 40 MB: 24 hours The backup battery requires about 24 hours to reach full charge after power to the fax unit is restored. French. F4: 80 sheets 2 (Paper weight: 75.30 ITU-T-standard MH. If not. 2 lines. 26400.7 (W) × 25. MR.4 and T.5m (L) mm 4.0 g/m or 20 lbs. 21600.2 in.0 (L) inches Min: 120 (W) × 100 (L) mm 216 (W) × 139.07 – 0. US models: English. French.4 (L) inches 8. 12000. 16800. A5 .5 (W) × 55. 31200. 8.0 (L) inches 2 2 Paper weight: 35 – 128 g/m 52 – 105 g/m Thickness: 0. the superfine resolution is “203 × 392“. Polish (Polish is for MFX1350 only) B/W and Color CCD Dry electrophotographic (LED) printer <ADF> Single sheet Two or more sheets Max: 216 (W) × 900 (L) mm 216 (W) × 356 (L) mm 8.05 – 0. 7200. Scanning method Recording method Acceptable document size ADF capacity Scanning resolution Effective Scanning width Transmission speed Document Memory Document memory backup <Copy> 600 × 300 dpi (600 × 600 dpi for ultra fine) <Scanner (TWAIN)> 200 dpi 200 dpi × 200 lpi 300 dpi 300 dpi × 300 lpi 600 dpi 600 dpi × 600 lpi US models: 8.1. 4800 and 2400 bps Allows up to three simultaneous operations. 20 characters per line. 1-2 . 19200.

Item Printing resolution Printing speed

MFX-1350 600 dpi Simplex printing :13 ppm Duplex printing : 5 spm (When loading letter or A4-sized paper from 1st paper cassette.)
US Approx. 5,000 Approx. 2,000 Europe Approx. 16,000 Approx. 3,000

F-305 13 ppm (When loading letter or A4-sized paper from 1st paper cassette.)

Toner yield
Consumable Starter Consumable Starter US Approx. 7,500 Approx. 2,000 Europe Approx. 15,000 Approx. 4,000

(Letter or A4, 6 % document coverage under 2-pages interval printing.) Drum life US Europe Approx. 20,000 Approx. 30,000 (Letter or A4-sized paper printing.)

(Letter or A4, 4 % document coverage under 2-pages interval printing.) US

Print margin Acceptable recording paper

Europe Approx. Approx. 20,000 20,000 (Letter or A4-sized paper printing.) Reading edge, Trailing edge, Left edge and Right edge: 3 ± 2 mm (0.12 ± 0.1 in.) Simplex printing <Paper cassette> Plain paper (US): Letter (SEF), Legal (SEF), Half-letter(LEF) Plain paper (Europe): A4 (SEF), A5 (SEF), F4 (LEF) 2 Paper weight: 60 – 90g/m , 20 – 24 lb <Bypass tray> Plain paper:

A4(SEF), A5(LEF)(SEF), A6(SEF), F4(SEF), Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF), Half letter(LEF), Executive(SEF) DL(SEF), COM10(SEF), Monarch(SEF) 100 × 148 mm (3.9 × 5.8 in.) (97 – 216 mm) × (140 – 356 mm) (Width × Length) (3.8 – 8.5 in.) × (5.5– 14 in.) (Width × Length) 2 60 – 90g/m , 20 – 24 lb —

Envelopes: Postcard: Custom size:

Transparency: Letter (USA), A4 (Europe)

Recording paper capacity

Receive paper tray capacity Printouts exit Environmental conditions Power requirements

Paper weight: Duplex printing Plain paper: Letter, Legal, A4, F4 <Paper cassette> 1st cassette: 500 sheets 2nd cassette (option): 500 sheets <Bypass tray> Plain paper: 50 sheet Postcard/Transparency: 20 sheets Envelope 1 envelop Approx. 250 sheets

Face down Ambient temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C (50 °F to 89.6 °F) Relative humidity: 20 % to 80 % with no condensation US models: 120 VAC ± 10 %; 50/60 Hz European models: 230 VAC ± 10 %; 50/60 Hz

1-3

Item Power consumption

MFX-1350 US 10 W 40 Wh 28 W 1030 W 1030 W 1040 W

F-305 Europe 12 W 41 Wh 29 W 920 W 920 W 940 W

Sleep mode Standby Memory Transmission Reception Copying Maximum Dimensions Standard:

520mm (W) × 450 mm (D) × 446 mm (H) 20.5 in. (W) × 17.7 in. (D) × 17.6 in. (H)

With optional cassette: 520mm (W) × 450 mm (D) × 566 mm (H) 20.5 in. (W) × 17.7 in. (D) × 22.3 in. (H)

350 mm

120 mm

446 mm

520 mm 520 mm

Weight Optional products

Approx. 20.8. kg (46 lbs.) Approx. 19.0. kg (42 lbs.) without consumables and trays. without consumables and trays. • Optional telephone handset • Second paper cassette • Upgrade memory • PCL printer controller • Network interface board • OfficeBridge Expansion kit (MFX-1350 only) • Second phone line kit • Mechanical page counter

1-4

450 mm

Section2 Machine Composition
2.1 Interconnect Block Diagram (1/2)
Connection Diagram (1/2)
P1
EH EH Core FMN

9 May, 2007
P17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P19 P2 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 VDD VSS VDD VSS VDD VSS VDD VSS VDD VSS VDD3 SO SCK /STROBE DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 /HSYNC LOAD GND CLK_N CLK_P GND (FFC) ZA1-02462-40 135mm
FMN

PCB DC/DC
DA7-08130-50 135 x 58 (Single) LINE Core
3T

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Option

+3.3VOP 2T +3.3VOP GND GND +24VOP +24VOP GND GND DA7-08450-50

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PHD

TEL1

PCB NCU (EUR)

FAX FRAME/PCB MAIN / DA71030010

TEL2

DA7-Y8040-50

or (USA)
DA7-08040-50

75 x 140
(Single)

PH

P8A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 +24VB /MTEN /MLOCK MTDIR MTCLK GND GND /COVER /MADF_B MADF_B /MADF_A MADF_A /MFBS_B MFBS_B /MFBS_A MFBS_A /APS /DS2 /DS1 /TXIL (B to B)

P80A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

6 6 7 7 8 8

LDS2A /DS2 GND

1 1 2 2 3 3

(Plate) Core

DS2 (PCB SENSOR) DA7-08180-50 46.6 x 8 (Single)
PH

CN2

EH

1 1 PCB 2 2 PSU100E_DA7 3 3 Core

3P

Inlet
Alternate current switch

DA7-08070-50 or

PCB PSU200E_DA7
DA7-Y8070-50 160 x 163 (Single)
CN101 1 2 1 2

FUSER HEATER (100V)
13ppm : ZA1-02362-00 19ppm : ZA1-02753-40

HEATER (200V)
13ppm : ZA1-02363-20 19ppm : ZA1-02754-60

4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 1010 1111 1212 1313 1414 1515

H/L HC1 HC2 +5VP +5VP GND GND +3.3VP +3.3VP GND GND +24VP +24VP GND GND DCB-21556-50A

Core

EH

P3

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15

SM

9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12

/MADF_B MADF_B /MADF_A MADF_A

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

ADF MOTOR ZA1-02454-50

PH

13 13 14 14 15 15

/APS GND +5V

1 1 2 2 3 3

APS Z90-37777-50

P83 EH P2 1 1 DA7-08330-50 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 MFBS_A /MFBS_A MFBS_B /MFBS_B 1 2 3 4
PH

Thermostat
Z90-50609-00

PRINTER FRAME/COVER / DA71050010

Thermal fuse
Z90-48827-00 DA7-08320-50
PH

USB

2 2

PCB MAIN MK2
DA7-18010-50

FBS MOTOR ZA1-02455-70

P88A PH
PH

P92

TRAYS Z90-37777-50

1 1 2 2 3 3

/TRYS GND +5VC

1 1 2 2 3 3 P90A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 P90B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TS1 +5V PES /OPEN1 /PSS /TRAYS +5VC /JAMC2 /PES2 /OPEN2 /OPCSST2 GND (B to B) BATT ERS +24V +24V COUNT PFCL2 RESCL PFCL1 TRYCL GND GND TS2 (B to B) P9A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 P9B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 1 2 2 3 3

/DUPS GND +5VA DCB-70338-50A

1 1 2 2 3 3

DUPS Z90-37777-50

CBL ASSY PRINTER(DA7-08210-50)
PH

PSS Z90-37777-50
CZ

1 1 2 2 3 3
51006(molex)

/PSS GND +5VC +24V /TRYCL +24V /PFCL +24V /RESCL

4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12

184 x 184 (four-layer)

PCB P88B PH CONNECT 1 1 2 2 A 3 3
DA7-08050-50
4 4 5 5 6 6

MDUP_A MDUP_B /MDUP_A /MDUP_B +24VA +24VA

1 2 3 4 5 6

DUPE MOTOR (Factory option) ZA1-02456-A0

TRYCL Z90-56069-00 PFCL Z90-48683-00

1 1 2 2 3 3

1 2
DA1-08570-50 PHN

84 x 116 (Single)
P8C
PHD PHD

2 1 1 2

P80C

CZ

51006(molex)

RESCL Z90-56069-00

1 1 2 2 3 3
PH

1 2
DA1-08570-50 PHN

PCB ERS LAMP 1 DA7-08170-50 2 10 x 236(Single)

1 2

1 2 2 1

13 13 +24V 2T 14 14 /ERS 15 15
PH

DCB-D0224-50A PH

CBL ASSY CASSETTE(DA7-08220-50)
PH

PES1 Z90-37777-50

1 1 2 2 3 3
PH

/PES1 GND +5VC

4 4 5 5 6 6

PH

PCB CONNECT B
DA7-08060-50

6 6 7 7 8 8

/PDS GND +5VA

1 1 2 2 3 3
SM

PDS Z90-37777-50

TS1 (PCB TOS)1 D88-09060-50 2 3 18 x 51(Single) 4 TS2 (PCB TOS) 1 D88-09060-50 2 3 18 x 51 (Single) 4

1 2 3 4
PH

+5VC TS1 GND NC

7 7 8 8 9 9 1010

9 9 10 10 11 11 P85 EH 2T 1 1 2 2 3 3

+24V +24VA

1 1 2 2

LFCUTDV /FCUTDV LFCUTDR /FCUTDR /DRUMSET +24V /FMLOCK GND 1 2 3

PH

PH P93

4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 P87 PH 1 1 2 2 3 3

CASSETTE(2ND) / DA71101010

OPEN2 Z90-37777-50

1 1 2 2 3 3

/OPEN2 GND +5V

1 1 2 2 3 3

CBL ASSY 2ND CASSETTE(DA7-08280-50)
PH

PH

JAMC2 Z90-37777-50

1 1 2 2 3 3
PHN

/JAMC2 GND +5V

GND BATT

PES2 Z90-37777-50

1 1 2 2 3 3

/PES2 GND +5VC

4 4 5 5 6 6

P95 PH 1 2 1 2

FAN 80mm ZA1-02364-40

7 7 8 8 9 9

P18 BATTERY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 HVTR HVTS HVTN HVTP HVBS HVBN HVRLR HVLMT HVCP GND GND +24V (B to B) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

DA7-08360-50 DA7-08370-50

CLEANING1(HV) CLEANING2(HV) DEVELOPER1(HV) DEVELOPER2(HV) CHARGER(HV) GRID(HV) TRANSFER(HV)

PFCL2 Z90-48683-00
OPTION(OTHER)

2 1 1 2

+24V /PFCL2

10 10 11 11

PCB PSU HV
Z90-48829-00 (Single)

DA7-08380-50 DA7-08390-50 DA7-08410-50 DA7-08420-50 DA7-08430-50

COUNTER Z90-35223-50

PH P94 +24V 2 1 1 1 /COUNT 1 2 DCB-D0224-50A 2 2

PHN

2-1

CBL ASSY FUSE (DA7-08260-50)

1 2 3 4

+5VC TS2 GND NC

1111 1212 1313 1414

78 x 85 (Single)

COVER-SW Inter lock 24V (ASSY INTERLOCK) DA7-08310-40
DVLPTYPE1 DVLPTYPE2

PRINTER FRAME/COVER / DA71050010

OPEN1 Z90-37777-50

11 22 33

/OPEN1 GND +5V

1 1 2 2 3 3

PH

3 3 4 4 5 5

/JAMC1 GND +5VA

CASSETTE / DA71100010

1 1 2 2 3 3

JAMC1 Z90-37777-50

CBL ASSY INTERLOCK24V (DA7-08240-50)

P91

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 1010 1111 1212 1313 1414 1515 1616 1717 1818 1919 2020 2121 2222 2323 2424 2525 2626 2727 2828 2929 3030

NEWDRUM FCUTDR /DRUMSET NEWDVLP /FMLOCK FCUTDV FANMC DVLPTYPE +24V +24V NC +24V GND NC GND GND MDUP_A /PSAVE2 MDUP_B /PSAVE1 /MDUP_A +5V /MDUP_B +5VA /OPDUP /DUPS /PDS +3V /JAMC1 THTMP DCB-53008-50A

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 1010 1111 1212 1313 1414 1515 1616 1717 1818 1919 2020 2121 2222 2323 2424 2525 2626 2727 2828 2929 3030

EH P90 EH 2T GND 1 1 1 +24VB 2 2 2 /MTEN 3 3 3 /MLOCK 4 4 4 MTDIR 5 5 5 MTCLK 6 6 6 DCB-20622-50A

1 2 3 4 5 6

RX MOTER Z90-48681-00

P89 EH
COre PHN

1 1 2 2

+3V THTMP

1 2 2 1

Fuser thermistor 13ppm Z90-52158-00 19ppm Z90-53042-00

FBS/SCANNER / DA71010010

ADF / DA71000010

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26

+24VN DP +24VN CML GND L GND H +5V S +5V RI RXA CONT24 +12V /OH1 TXA /OH2 GND /CI AREF /DSE2 CNG /DSE1 -12V NC DCB-52634-50A

2T

PHD

P4

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 1010 1111 1212 1313 1414 1515 1616 1717 1818

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18

PCB CONNECT C

LED HEAD

DA7-08100-50 35 x 50 (Double)

Z90-49754-00

P82

PH

PHN 2T

1 1 2 2

/TXIL GND

1 2 2 1
PH

TXIL (ASSY MICRO-SW) DA7-08340-40 DS1 (PCB SENSOR) DA7-08180-50 46.6 x 8 (Single)

3 3 4 4 5 5

LDS1 /DS1 GND

1 1 2 2 3 3

ASSY ADF(DA7-08230-40)

PRINTER FRAME/COVER / DA71050010

OPTION(OTHER)

PHD 2T

2T VDD VSS VDD VSS VDD3 SO SCK /STROBE DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 /HSYNC LOAD GNDL CLKN CLKP GNDL DCB-51854-50A

PHD

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24

Interconnect Block Diagram (2/2)
Connection Diagram (2/2)
PH 52271 3T 3T P52 P50 GND (molex) SP1 1 1 1 1 V0 SP2 2 2 2 2 +5V PRXD 3 3 3 3 RS PLOAD 4 4 4 4 R/W +5V 5 5 5 5 LE GND 6 6 6 6 DB0 GND 7 7 7 7 DB1 +5V 8 8 8 8 DB2 +24V 9 9 9 9 DB3 LSCK 10 10 DA7-08020-50 10 10 DB4 LDS 11 11 11 11 DB5 LEDWR1 12 12 12 12 DB6 LEDWR2 13 13 330 x 87.5 13 13 DB7 LLE 14 14 14 14 (FFC) /OTCH1 (Single) 15 15 P51 /OTCH2 PH 16 16 SP1 DA7-08540-50 1 1 SP2 2 2 PH

May 9,2007
P5 P6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Core Core FMN Core Core FMZ

PANEL / DA71020010

ZA1-02394-20

PCB CCD

SCAN-LAMP (ASSY LAMP)

SPEAKER (ASSY SP) D91-08490-40

Compact Flash Memory card
ZA1-02477-60 OB-400 only

1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29 5 30 6 31 7 32 8 33 9 34 10 35 11 36 12 37 13 38 14 39 15 40 16 41 17 42 18 43 19 44 20 45 21 46 22 47 23 48 24 49 25 50

GND /CD1 D3 D11 D4 D12 D5 D13 D6 D14 D7 D15 /CE1 /CE2 A10 /VS1 /ATASEL /IORD A9 /IOWR A8 /WE A7 INTRQ VCC VCC A6 /CSEL A5 /VS2 A4 /RESET A3 IORDY A2 /INPACK A1 /REG A0 /DASP D0 /PDIAG D1 D8 D2 D9 /IOIS16 D10 CD2 GND

P3 1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29 5 30 6 31 7 32 8 33 9 34 10 35 11 36 12 37 13 38 14 39 15 40 16 41 17 42 18 43 19 44 20 45 21 46 22 47 23 48 24 49 25 50

PCB INVERTER

P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 D15 D13 D14 GND D12 D10 D11 GND D9 D7 D8 GND D6 D4 D5 GND D3 D1 D2 GND +3.3V +3.3V D0 A6 +3.3V A4 A5 GND A3 A1 A2 PSAVE /RD_EFI /WR_EFI /CS_EFI GND +5V +5V BSY_EFI NC +5V REQD_EFI REQU_EFI GND /ACKU_EFI /INT_EFI /ACKD_EFI GND /RST_EFI NC (B to B)

P12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 P1 VSS A3 A4 A2 A5 A1 A6 A0 A7 VDD PD1 VSS VDD VSS A8 A10 A9 BS1 A11 BS0 A12 VDD VSS /CS0 CKE /CS1 /CS2 /CS3 /RAS VDD VSS /CAS VSS VSS CLK VSS VSS /WE N.C VDD VDD VDD VDD DQML DQMU DQ7 DQ8 DQ6 DQ9 DQ5 DQ10 DQ4 DQ11 DQ3 DQ12 DQ2 DQ13 VSS VDD VSS VDD DQ1 DQ14 DQ0 DQ15 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 VSS (B to B) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72

ZA1-02336-00/MFP620mm ZA1-02337-10/PPF380mm

P11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 P10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 A8 A7 GND A6 D15 D14 GND D13 D12 D11 GND D10 D9 D8 GND D7 D6 D5 GND D4 D3 D2 GND D1 D0 A5 GND A4 A3 A2 GND A1 +5V +5V GND /RD /WR /CSPORT /CSHDD /CSCDC /CSMDM REQENC /RESET REQDEC +3.3V +3.3V GND /ACKENC /ACKDEC /INTCI ID0 /INTCDC /IMTMDM REQTX GND REQRX BUSY +12V GND RXSIG -12V +24V GND HI/MID MEL ID1 GND NC (B to B) D15 D13 D14 GND D12 D10 D11 GND D9 D7 D8 GND D6 D4 D5 GND D3 D1 D2 GND +3.3V +3.3V D0 A6 +3.3V A4 A5 GND A3 A1 A2 PSAVE /RD_EFI /WR_EFI /CS_EFI GND +5V +5V BSY_EFI NC +5V REQD_EFI REQU_EFI GND /ACKU_EFI /INT_EFI /ACKD_EFI GND /RST_EFI NC (B to B)

P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

[OB-400] PCB NGP
DA7-08110-50

[OP-550] PCB PCL2 (USA)
DA5-08060-50

or [NP-400] PCB NETWORK
DA4-08012-50 176 x 136 (four layer)

or PCB PCL2 FG (EUR)
DA5-08061-50 176 x 90 (four layer)

PCB MAIN MK2
DA7-18010-50

OPTION(OTHER) / DA71200010 or NGP / DA71080010

RJ45
Core

184 x 184 (four layer)

P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 DA1-08121-50 35 36 37 59.69 x 40 38 39 t=10 40 (four layer)41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72

P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PHD PHD 10 +24VN 11 1 1 1 1 DP 12 2 2 2 2 +24VN 13 3 3 3 3 CML 14 4 4 4 4 GND 15 5 5 5 5 L 16 6 6 6 6 GND 17 7 7 7 7 H 18 8 8 8 8 +5VN 19 9 9 9 9 S 20 10 10 10 10 +5VN 21 11 11 11 11 RI 22 12 12 DA7-Y8042-50 12 12 RXA 23 13 13 13 13 CONT24 24 14 14 14 14 +12VN 25 15 15 15 15 /OH1 26 16 16 16 16 TXA 27 17 17 DA7-08041-50 17 17 /OH2 28 18 18 18 18 GND 29 19 19 19 19 /CI 75 x 140 30 [AL-500] 20 20 20 20 AREF 31 21 21 21 21 (single) PCB /DSE2 32 22 22 22 22 TONE 33 EXT LINE DFX23 23 23 23 /DSE1 34 DA5-18050-50 24 24 24 24 -12VN 35 25 25 25 25 NC 36 114 x 74 26 26 DCB-52624-50A 26 26 37 38 (four layser) 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Option 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68

PCB NCU

(EUR)

or (USA)

PCB EX.MEMORY

2-2

OPTION(OTHER) / DA71200010

FBS/SCANNER / DA71010010

LCD 20 Characters 2 lines

PCB PANEL

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

+12V +12V BW/COL /SAMP +5V +5V GND SH GND P1 GND P2 GND RS GND CP PSAVE CLM1 CLM0 GND VIDEO GND HS GND GND24 GND24 GND24 +24V +24V +24V (FFC)

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

P1 30 1 29 2 28 3 P2 PH 27 4 PH HS 26 5 1 1 1 1 HS GND 25 6 2 2 2 2 +5V 24 7 3 3 3 3 Z90-37777-50 DCB-70306-50A 23 8 22 9 10 21 11 20 12 19 13 18 14 17 90mm 15 DA7-08030-50 16 16 15 DA7-08300-40 17 14 35 x 176 18 13 19 (four layer) 12 UL3239(#22) 340mm 20 11 21 10 22 9 23 8 P4 EH CN2 BH EH CN1 N 24 7 GND 2T 22 11 11 25 6 +24V L 22 22 26 5 DA7-08090-50 1 1 27 4 DA7-08510-50 28 3 35 x 50 29 2 t=10 (Single) 30 1

2.2 Main Control PCB
The main control PCB controls the operations of all machine functions. Jumper JP1 on the main control PCB is used for battery back up of the SRAM. All user programmed data and internal memory switch settings are held in SRAM. Removing JP1 will initialize the SRAM. NOTE: JP1 should remain in the "ON" position at all times. Memory (FLASH MEMORY, SRAM, SDRAM) FLASH MEMORY -- The FLASH MEMORY contains all program instructions for unit operation. SRAM --The SRAM, which is backed-up by a lithium battery is used to store user programmed information. SDRAM --The SDRAM is used for buffer, which is backed-up by a battery is used to store memorized documents. NOTE: Turning parameters for Color(R,G,B) and Gray mode are stored in the EEPROM(IC42). When the PCB MAIN is replaced, the EEPROM on malfunction PCB should be replaced to the new PCB.
DISPLAY KEY NCU PCB PANEL G/A

TONE RXA +24V,+12V,AREF

TXA PNAEL PCB

MODEM CCFL INVERTER

MONITOR CONTROL

+24V

SDRAM CPU USB

CCD

IMAGE PROCESS MFP ENGINE

FLASH MEMORY Lithium SRAM

CCD PCB

FBS MOTOR

MOTOR CONTROL

ADF MOTOR

SDRAM PRINTER CONTROL

SDRAM Extention Memory

+24V, +5V,+3.3V +24V, AC POWER SUPPLY UNIT PRINTER UNIT H.V.POWER SUPPLY UNIT MAIN CONTROL PCB

Ni-MH

CENECTOR-B PCB

Main control PCB block diagram

2-3

2.3 Network Control Unit (NCU) PCB
The NCU PCB provides the connection to the telephone line. It consists of the interface circuit, ring signal detector and telephone control circuit.

NCU PCB block diagram for US

NCU PCB block diagram for Europe Major components of the NCU DP relay Connects the telephone line to the fax. S relay Used to connect the telephone line at seizure state. OH & Tone detector Detects the On-hook condition of the second telephone unit. H relay Disconnects the Tel1 and Tel2 line from PSTN. 24V generator Supplies 24 volts to the relays for OH detection of optional handset or external telephone line. Ring signal detector A photo coupler that detects an incoming ring. 2-4

2.4 Power Supply Unit (PSU)
The power supply unit receives the input line voltage and currents it to output voltages of +3.3DVC, +5 VDC and +24 VDC. The heater circuit controls output voltage to the fuser heater according to instructions received from the heater control circuit. If an over-current is sensed in the secondary circuit, power is interrupted.

Power supply unit block diagram for US

Power supply unit block diagram for Europe The power supply unit has two output connectors. The following table shows the connector outputs: CN101 -- to the Fuser Heater
Pin No. Output 1 L 2 N

CN2 -- to the Main Control PCB.
Pin No. Output voltage 1 PC 2 3 4 +5V 5 6 SG 7 8 9 10 SG 11 12 13 14 PG 15

HC1 HC2

+3.3V

+24V

2-5

2.5 Sensors
2.5.1 Sensor Locations
The following illustration shows the relative positions of the machine’s sensors.

HS PES1 TS2

TS1 JAMC2 OPEN2

PES2

APS

DS1

DS2 TXIL

COVER-SW PDS DPS JAMC1 PSS

Thermistor OPEN1 TRAYS

2-6

5.2. Code Name Detects Sensor Type DS1 Document sensor 1 Presence of document in Photo feeder interrupter DS2 Document sensor 2 Leading and trailing edge of Photo document interrupter APS ADF permit sensor Platen cover quite close or not Photo interrupter HS Mirror carriage home Mirror carriage position Photo position sensor interrupter TXIL(ADF) Interlock switch Scanner cover open or close Mechanical (ADF) Switch Cover-SW --Detects front cover and the Mechanical 1st cassette jam access cover Switch are open or close PDS Paper discharge Detects paper pass at paper Photo sensor exit.2 Sensor Descriptions The following table gives a brief description of each sensor and its function. interrupter DPS Duplex paper sensor Detects paper pass of the Photo duplex printing paper interrupter Thermistor ---Detects and controls the Thermistor Heater Roller temperature OPEN1 Paper cassette open Detects the 1st paper Photo sensor cassette open or close interrupter PES Paper empty sensor Detects presence of recording Photo paper in the 1st paper interrupter cassette TS1 Toner sensor 1 Detects the toner empty for Photo small capacity toner cartridge interrupter TS2 Toner sensor Detects the toner empty for Photo large capacity toner cartridge interrupter PSS Paper supply sensor Detects paper feeding out of Photo cassette/tray interrupter TRAYS Tray sensor Detects presence of recording Photo paper in the bypass tray interrupter JAMC1 Jam access cover Detects the side cover open Photo sensor or close interrupter PES2 OPEN2 JAMC2 Paper empty sensor Paper cassette open sensor Jam access cover sensor Detects presence of recording paper in the 2nd paper cassette Detects the 2nd paper cassette open or close Detects the 2nd paper cassette side cover open or close Remarks MFX-1350 only MFX-1350 only MFX-1350 only Photo interrupter Photo interrupter Photo interrupter 2-7 .

The machine uses the distance from DS2 to the scan position and the diameter of the feed roller to determine the number of rotations necessary to feed the document to the scan position. The document will be transferred when the start key is pressed. B. Following the document separation. As it advances. Document separation is the process that allows a multi-page document to go through the scanner one page at a time.6. the feed roller continues to rotate until the document reaches the scan position. As the reflected image passes through the lens. The scanner continues to remain active for a few more seconds in case there is another document to follow. the leading edge of the document activates the Document Sensor 2 (DS2) sensor. Document Sensor 1 (DS1) is activated and you will hear the short beep. the light from the scanner lamp strikes the face of the document and is reflected into the lens through mirrors A.1 ADF Detection When a document is placed into the document feeder. or image data. the feed roller causes the document to advance. The scanned document is discharged through the document exit by the exit roller. The CCD then converts the dark and light areas of the image into electrical impulses. The top document is separated from the remaining documents by the friction of the separator roller. and C. In case the light intensity along the length of the scanner lamp is not uniform.6 Document Scanning Sequence 2.2. it is focused onto the charged coupled device (CCD). When the document reaches the scan position. the image signal output is turned off. Once DS2 is activated. MFX-1350 Separator roller Separator pad Pickup roller DS1 (Feeler) Exit roller Feed roller DS2 (Feeler) Press roller Mirror B CCD Lens Home sensor Mirror A Mirror C Scanner unit Mirror A F-305 Separator roller Separator pad Pickup roller DS1 (Feeler) Exit roller Feed roller DS2 (Feeler) Press roller Mirror B CCD Lens Home sensor Mirror A Mirror C Scanner unit Mirror A 2-8 . shading compensation is provided to ensure even illumination. When DS2 detects the trailing edge of the document.

6.6.6. 2 Exposure Lamp A Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp (CCFL) is used to illuminate the original. 3 Mirror Directs the reflected light from the original to the lens. The CCD sensor converts the light pattern (image data) into an electrical image signal. The electrical image signal is then output to the Main Board.2. CCD Scanner unit Home sensor 2.2.2 FBS section (MFX-1350 only) Light reflected from the original passes through three mirrors and a lens to form a reduced image on the CCD Sensor as the Scanner Motor moves the Scanner.1 Exposure Section: Construction and Function 1 2 1 3 1 Reflector Tape The Reflector Tape reflects the light from the Exposure Lamp and supplements its illumination.1. 2-9 .2 Original Detection The sizes of the documents are detected by the following two sensors. Detection Document presence Leading and trailing edge detection Action Sensor DS1 DS2 Detects whether there is a document on the tray or not Detects the leading and trailing edge of the feeding document 2.

The light is reflected from the original to the Mirror through the lens to the CCD. FBS Motor Lamp Home sensor CCD PCB Lens Scanner frame 2-10 .2. • Scanner speed is determined by the set zoom ratio in reference to the full size mode. the scanner frame projects an even amount of light from the Exposure Lamp onto the entire surface of the original.2 Scanner frame Moving Mechanism • During a scan.6. • The scanner frame is at home position where ADF scanning begins. The home sensor watches this position.2. • The scanner frame is driven by the FBS Motor and Scanner Drive belts.

2. it is transferred to the exit. However after a few steps after the PDS and DPS sensor detected the trailing edge. It is then fed by the rotation of the register roller. It reaches to the image transfer area turned inside out. MFX-1350 can print both sides of the paper (duplex printing). 2-11 .7. When the first side of the paper is printed. and the duplex side of the paper is printed.7 Recording Section 2. The paper is moved along the paper guide until it reaches the register roller. the exit roller rolls in reverse and the paper is transferred to the image processing area by the duplex rollers.1 Recording Paper Feed Path A sheet of the recording paper is separated from the remaining paper by the friction of the pickup roller.

The image processing is roughly divide into the following steps: 1. It also keeps the wire from becoming dirty. Development 4. demodulates the data.8 Image Processing Incoming data is received from the telephone line by the NCU and sent to the main control PCB. individual elements in the LED print head turn on and expose the drum wherever a dark area should appear in the document.2. When the document is to be printed.8. located inside the printer cover.8. Because the discharge. the Drum can be charged evenly. • The corona discharge generates little ozone in the printer. Image transfer 5. Cleaning Drum charging Cleaning Exposure Fusing Drum Eraser Lamp Image transfer Development 2. The modem. closes down over the drum and projects light onto the drum surface. The LED print head. The data is then sent to the printer for image processing. Fusing 6. 2. Erasing 7.2 Drum Exposure The light makes an invisible static image from the LED print head. located on the main control PCB.1 Drum Charge • The Drum is charged with corona discharge before LED exposure. Drum Exposure 3. 2-12 . Drum Charging 2. A charge wire and a charge grid are used for the charging method.

there is no blur of toner because the paper is always pressed by the Drum and the Image Transfer Roller.3 Development Toner is applied to the invisible static image on the Drum and a toner image is created on the surface. Carries the toner to the Drum surface for development. Transports the toner to the developing roller.8.8.2. Image transfer roller PC Drum Hight voltage unit . Exposed by LED light to create an invisible image and rotates to carry the developed image to the paper surface. there is little generation of ozone due to corona discharge.4 Image Transfer Image transfer is the process of transferring the toner image created on the Drum in the developing process to paper. In the Roller Image Transfer.output 2-13 . Also. 2. Toner agitator Drum Developing roller Toner supply roller 1 2 3 4 Part Name Toner Agitator Toner supply Roller Developing Roller Drum Function Agitates toner.

Cleaning Drum Development 2-14 .2. when it is exposed the drum charge erases. and is recycled. And then by a metallic roller.8.5 Erasing An LED lamp exposes the Drum surface. The residual toner is removed by the developing roller and toner supply roller. Paper dust is removed from the drum surface by a rubber roller. This helps the drum to be recharged evenly at the next step of charging. and finally scraped off.8.6 Cleaning The residual toner or paper dust must be removed from the drum. Drum LED Lamp 2.

and securely fixed by the pressure between the Heater roller and Press rollers. The Thermostat functions when the Heater Lamp is not turned OFF even if the Thermistor detects a high temperature malfunction. The toner image is fused by Heater Roller heated by the Heater Lamp. A Thermistor detects and controls the Heater Roller temperature. Press roller Exit roller Paper separate blade Thermistor Heater lamp Heater roller Press roller 2-15 . A heat roller system is used as the fusing system.7 Fusing An Overview The toner image transferred on to the paper is securely fixed.2.8.

the thermal cut-off shuts down the power to the heater lamp. warming up of the printer starts and the Heater Lamp turns ON until the temperature of the Heater Roller reaches approx. The fuser kept at low temperature. 110 °C. the printer turns to standby mode. the Heater Roller is maintained at 180 °C. The Heater Roller maintained at approx. When the printer obtains the printing command from its controller.Fusing Temperature Control Circuit The Thermistor detects the surface temperature of the Heater Roller and inputs that analog voltage into the Main Control PCB. causing the Heater Lamp to turn ON or OFF to control the fusing temperature. 180 °C. AC Inlet L N Main switch Power supply unit Heater on/off switch Main Control PCB Fusing temperture control circuit Fusing unit Thermistor Heater Lamp Thermostat Thermal cut-off Fusing temperature 1) Warming Up After the initialization of the printer. saving the power. 2) Printing 3) Standby mode 4) Energy save mode In this mode. When the thermostat is malfunction. the thermostat shuts down the power to the heater lamp. When the Heater Lamp is not turned OFF even if the Thermistor detects a high temperature malfunction. After printing. the Heater Lamp ON/OFF signal is output to the Heater ON/OFF switch of the power supply unit. Corresponding to this data. Temperature ( F) ( C) 200 392 180 356 320 160 Post card printing only OHP 230 110 Warming up Power ON Printing Standby mode Energy save mode Time 2-16 .

...............<Menu>.......<Menu>...................... <1> Allows the technician to perform a series of diagnostic tests........... <0>.....<Menu>..<Menu>......... <5> Used to print a G3 procedural summary of the fax communication.......... <*>................................................................... <0>............... <0>.......<Menu>.. Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode ........ <*>... Line Tests ....<Menu>.............. <*>....... <2> Erases user–programmed information (date..........................<Menu>...... Set or Clear Unique Switches........................... <7> Used to print out a list that reports the machine’s usage and error history................................................... <*>.............1 Field Service Program Modes The fax machine features maintenance modes for machine adjustments........... <*>. All RAM Clear ....... <6> Access this mode to determine the cause of the “Please Call Service” error message........ Factory Functions .................... Or................... Clear Programmed Data / User Settings .<Menu>...............<Menu>...................... as there is no problem.. <*>........ autodialer.................... <4> Used to set or clear Unique switches............................................................................................. <1>......<Menu>... Each mode is listed below along with the command used to activate the mode and a brief functional description... <1>.............................................................. <*>. <0>.<Menu>...... <0>............................... <3> Erases same information as “Clear Programmed Data / User Settings” function along with resetting all of the machine parameters............................. Life Monitor Maintenance .............. Service Report Printing ........ <*>. <9> Allows the technician to perform a series of diagnostic tests........... Set or Clear Machine Parameters...... <*>......... <5> Used to set or clear the consumable order sheet. However continue the operation................... Print Machine Parameters............30 Monitor .........<Menu>. you will hear short beeps.... <0>....... Set or Clear Memory Switches .... <0> When the main control PCB has been replaced............... <1>.................... <0>. <*>..... Set Service Code ............................. <2>...... <*>...............<Menu>............... <*>......... <2> Allows the technician to perform a series of diagnostic tests....... 3-1 .... TTI...<Menu>.) and any documents stored in memory........... Monitor Speaker................ <6> Used to clear a DRAM...... <*>..<Menu>...... <7> Used to clear a Life monitor keeps a count of the pages scanned......................... <0>. Memory Switches and Unique Switches List .<Menu>........Section3 Adjustment Procedures 3.............. Note: When you press “ * ”....... <1> Use to set or clear memory switches......................................... Set or clear the consumable order sheet . <4> Perform it before installing the fax machine.............. <*>...... time....... Clear Life Monitor ................................ T.............. Test Modes ............................................... when replaced the Fuser unit or Image transfer roller.................. Printer maintenance .....................<Menu>.................<Menu>.................<Menu>.... reset the counter using this mode.... <0> Used to set or clear machine parameters.............................. <*>....... <8> Use to hear the signal sound with machine’s speaker during fax transaction............ DRAM Clear ................ etc..... <8> Used to clear a SRAM of option module...................................... <1>................. <1>....................... <0>........... <1>.............................................. memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults............ <*>.......... you should register the previous several counter values of the life monitor....................... <*>....... <0> Prints a list of the machine switch settings showing the default settings and current settings............................. <1>............................................ <1>................................................................................................................ <1>...................... <*>..................... etc........... <0>....... <9> Used to protect to clear a Life monitor....................... Clear option module’s SRAM .................... <*>. <*>...<Menu>..................................

.......................... <*>... <*>............... <*>.... <8> Used to upgrade the software using the USB RomWrite application.......... <2>.. 3-2 ... <2>...........<Menu>........<Menu>.................................... Flash ROM Sum check.............<Menu>... <*>.............................................. <4>................Sensor Input test ........................................... <2>.. <8> Used to set memory switches................. ECM mode.......... <2> Sensor diagnostic test.............................. Network service mode . <2>............................................................................ pose length and numbers of rings for the second telephone line. Printer registration adjustment ........... <*>........................... <*>.... Quick installation mode ... <*>....................................... <3> Printer diagnostic test............ <9>....................................... <2> Used to enter location where to send the service report........ consumable order sheet setting and service report setting continuously....................................... <9> You can set the initial setting mode...................... <9> Used to confirm flash ROM Check Sum after the software is overwritten.... unique switches.....<Menu>.................................<Menu>.....................................<Menu>.... when an optional network board is installed..........<Menu>.................................. <3> Used to adjust the printer registration.... <*>.. <4>. Printer diagnostic mode ... <4> Used to display the server sumcheck or to initialize the network settings............................. Service Report setting . <*>...... <2>..............<Menu>................<Menu>................... Update the software ........... <9>............ Set second line ............

Set Parameters / /Enter 2. Clear Parameters / /Enter 2. If you want to set other machine parameters.2. Press <Enter> to save the setting of the displayed parameter and return to the machine parameter edit screen. Select Parameters 000:00000000 4. Press <Enter>. 001:01010000 01010000 Bit No. or < > or < >. to change the bit value. <*>. • • • • 76543210 5. Note: You can confirm the initial setting of each Machine parameter by the Machine Parameters List.<0>.2. press <Cancel>.<0>. From standby. 3. Press <Enter>. press <Menu>. From standby.1 Setting the Machine Parameters These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. 3-3 . Otherwise. 1.2 Clearing the Machine Parameters Resets the machine parameters to factory defaults. The machine parameters will reset to factory defaults. 7.3. or by pressing the numeric keypad. press <Menu>. repeat step 3–5. The primary back up battery maintains these settings if power is lost. 3. To navigate through the machine parameter settings: The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right).<*>.<0>. Press < > or < > of the cursor key to move the cursor.< >. 1. The Machine Parameters List will be printed by pressing <Menu>. 6.<0>. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby. proceed to step 7.<1>. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment 3. Note: To finish the operation without clearing the parameters. Call up the desired switch by pressing < > or< >.<0>. • Press <Menu> not to save the setting of the displayed parameter. Clear Parameters Yes → Enter 3. Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad. 4. Press <Enter>. <*>. Press <Enter>.

i.68 mm –1.76 mm +2. (This switch is read only.e.68mm 0 mm –0.36 mm –2. For example.71 mm +1. Machine Parameter 008 and 009 ––– Factory use only Machine Parameter 010 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust ADF scanner registration adjustment (Horizontal) Adjusts the start point to scan the document.76 mm Initial setting 127 steps 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10100000 : –127steps 11111111 3-4 . Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +10.36 mm +0.71 mm –10. if three “1” are indicated. 1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it.Machine Parameter 000 ∼ 006 ––– Factory use only Machine Parameter 007 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only DRAM capacity indication on the Expansion Memory Usage/Comments DRAM capacity indication on the Main PCB This switch indicates the DRAM capacity.0847 mm) Note: These values are factory set and should not be adjusted unless instructed by a Muratec technical representative. the DRAM capacity is 8MB x 3 = 24MB. do not set any character) You can see the memory capacity by how many “1” is indicated on the LCD. One “1” means 8MB. “00000111”.

1 % 10000010 –0.Machine Parameter 011 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for ADF. Each setting changes by 0.3 % –1.5 % : 00001000 +0.8 % : 10001111 –1.8 % +0.5 % Initial setting Machine Parameter 012 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for ADF.4 % : 10001000 –0. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 00001111 +1.4 % : 00000010 +0.1 % 0% – 0.1% Note: These values are factory set and should not be adjusted unless instructed by a Muratec technical representative.2 % : 10000100 –0.1% Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000001 00000000 10000001 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10001101 : 10001111 Settings +1. (Horizontal) The plus setting stretches the image data and the minus setting squeezes it.5 % Initial setting Standard 3-5 .2 % 00000001 +0.8 % –1. (Vertical) The plus setting squeezes the image data and the minus setting stretches it.1 % 00000000 0% 10000001 –0.4 % –0.8 % : 00000100 +0.5 % +0.1 % –0. Each setting changes by 0.

6 mm –0.36 mm +0.71 mm : 00010000 +1.71 mm : –127steps 11111111 –10.0847 mm) Note: These values are factory set and should not be adjusted unless instructed by a Muratec technical representative.71 mm –10.6 mm : 10001000 –0.76 mm Initial setting 1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0. 127 steps 01111111 +10.68mm : 00000000 15.71 mm +1.36 mm : 00001010 +0.68 mm –1.08 mm Initial setting : 00001000 +0. Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +10.68 mm : 10010000 –1.76 mm : 00100000 +2.68mm 15.0847 mm) Note: These values are factory set and should not be adjusted unless instructed by a Muratec technical representative.Machine Parameter 013 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position.76 mm 3-6 .76 mm +2.36 mm –1. Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings 1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0. 127 steps 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10010001 : 10100000 : –127steps 11111111 Machine Parameter 014 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 Adjust Trailing edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2).44 mm –2.36 mm : 10100000 –2.

68 mm –1.1% Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000010 00000001 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10001111 Settings +1.4 % +0. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. 1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0.71 mm –10. Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +10. (Horizontal) The plus setting stretches the image data and the minus setting squeezes it.8 % +0.5 % Initial setting 3-7 .71 mm +1.1 % 0% –0.17 mm –0.2 % –0.5 % +0.36 mm –2.76 mm Initial setting 127 steps 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10000010 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10100000 : –127steps 11111111 Machine Parameter 016 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for FBS.1 % –0.76 mm +2.36 mm +0.68mm 0 mm –0.2 % +0.0847 mm) Note: These values are factory set and should not be adjusted unless instructed by a Muratec technical representative.4 % –0. Each setting changes by 0.Machine Parameter 015 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Adjust FBS scanner registration adjustment (Horizontal) Adjusts the start point to scan the document.8 % –1.

4 % –0.5 % +0.17 mm 10010000 – 0.2 % –0.17 mm 21.87 mm +0.68 mm +0. Each setting changes by 0. Each setting changes by 0.34 mm 10100000 – 0.1% Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00001111 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000010 00000001 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10001111 Settings +1.36 mm +0.70mm Initial setting 3-8 . Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 127steps 01111111 : 64 steps 01000000 : 41 steps 00101001 : 32 steps 00100000 : 16 steps 00010000 : 8 steps 00001000 : 00000000 : – 8 steps 10001000 : – 16 steps : – 32 steps : – 64 steps : – 127steps Settings +2.2 % +0.0212 mm.4 % +0.85 mm – 0.70 mm +1.68mm 11000000 – 1.8 % +0.36 mm 11111111 – 2. Note: These values are factory set and should not be adjusted unless instructed by a Muratec technical representative. (Vertical) The plus setting squeezes the image data and the minus setting stretches it.34 mm +0.1 % –0.8 % –1.1 % 0% –0.Machine Parameter 017 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for FBS.5 % Initial setting Machine Parameter 018 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment For FBS Adjusts the leading edge margin after Home Sensor OFF to the start of scanning the position.

26 mm +7.17 mm : 00000000 21.14 mm 9.89 mm +11.34 mm : 8 steps 00001000 +0.82 mm +1. For example.70 mm : 64 steps 01000000 +1.41 mm +0.Machine Parameter 019 ––– Factory use only Machine Parameter 020 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Adjust Mirror carriage standby position adjustment Adjusts the number of the steps from the home sensor of the mirror carriage OFF to the standby position. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 127steps 01111111 : 80 steps 01010000 : 50 steps 00110010 : 20 steps 00010100 : 10 steps 00001010 : 3 steps 00000011 2 steps 00000010 1 step 00000001 00000000 Settings +17.42 mm +0.15 mm When Switch 7 is “1”.0212 mm Note: These values are factory set and should not be adjusted unless instructed by a Muratec technical representative. 1 step = 0.70mm Machine Parameter 022 ∼ 024 ––– Factory use only 3-9 .14 mm”.36 mm : – 127steps 11111111 – 2. 1 step = 0.68 mm : 16 steps 00010000 +0.28 mm +0.68mm : – 64 steps 11000000 – 1.04 mm +2.34 mm : – 32 steps 10100000 – 0.0212 mm Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127steps 01111111 +2.17 mm : – 16 steps 10010000 – 0.36 mm : 32 steps 00100000 +0. “10000001” means “–0. Machine Parameter 021 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Mirror carriage transfer mode position adjustment Adjusts the number of the steps from the home sensor of the mirror carriage OFF to the transfer mode position.5 mm Initial setting : – 8 steps 10001000 – 0. it means “ – ”.

35 mm – 0. 1 step = 0.0212 mm Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 : 64 steps 01000000 : 32 steps 00100000 : 16 steps 00010000 : 8 steps 00001000 : 00000000 : – 8 steps 10001000 : – 16 steps 10010000 : – 32 steps 10100000 : – 64 steps 11000000 : – 127steps 11111111 127steps Settings +2.17 mm 15.70 mm +1.36 mm +0.17 mm – 0.Machine Parameter 025 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Background level adjustment starting position Adjusts the number of the steps from the home sensor of the mirror carriage OFF to the background level adjusting start position.34 mm – 0.36 mm – 2.34 mm +0.70mm Initial setting Machine Parameter 026 ∼ 029 ––– Factory use only 3-10 .68 mm +0.68mm – 1.

Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 11111111 Darkest setting Initial setting Lightest setting Machine Parameter 032 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in super–fine resolution.Machine Parameter 030 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in normal resolution. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 11111111 Darkest setting Initial setting Lightest setting Machine Parameter 031 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in fine resolution. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 11111111 Darkest setting Initial setting Lightest setting 3-11 .

Machine Parameter 033 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in hyper–fine resolution. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 11111111 Darkest setting Initial setting Lightest setting Machine Parameter 034 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Scanning density level adjustment in hyper–fine (600dpi × 600dpi) resolution. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 01111111 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 11111111 Darkest setting Initial setting Lightest setting Machine Parameter 035 ∼ 089 ––– Factory use only 3-12 .

Note: This setting does not affect the simplex fax reception. Note: This setting does not affect the rotate fax reception. 0: Yes 1: No Able to use the 1st cassette in normal fax reception. See Machine Parameter 091 for the rotate fax reception. See Machine Parameter 090 for the rotate fax reception. 0: Yes 1: No Usage/Comments When set to “1”. the cassette is not available in duplex reception. 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Able to use the 2nd cassette in normal fax reception. 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Machine Parameter 091 ––– Factory use only Machine Parameter 092 Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Able to use the bypass tray in duplex reception.Machine Parameter 090 Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Able to use the bypass tray in normal fax reception. 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Able to use the 2nd cassette in duplex reception. 0: Yes 1: No Able to use the 1st cassette in duplex reception. the cassette is not available in fax reception. 0: Yes 1: No Usage/Comments When set to “1”. 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Machine Parameter 093 ∼ 099 ––– Factory use only 3-13 .

Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to “0 mm” in Unique Switch 52. Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to “0 mm” in Unique Switch 52.6773 mm). The setting changes by 16 dots (0. set the margin to the initial setting in Unique Switch 52. Then. Adjusts the start point to print. Then. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. Adjusts the start point to print. set the margin to the initial setting in Unique Switch 52. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. Machine Parameter 101 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 2nd cassette for printing. The setting changes by 16 dots (0.6773 mm). after setting this switch. after setting this switch. 3-14 . Usage/Comments See table on page 3-20. Then. set the margin to the initial setting in Unique Switch 52. Usage/Comments See table on page 3-20. Machine Parameter 102 ∼ 106 ––– Factory use only Machine Parameter 107 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the Bypass tray for printing. Adjusts the start point to print. after setting this switch.6773 mm). The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to “0 mm” in Unique Switch 52.Machine Parameter 100 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at the 1st cassette for printing. The setting changes by 16 dots (0. Usage/Comments See table on page 3-20.

Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to “0 mm” in Unique Switch 52. Machine Parameter 109 and 139 ––– Factory use only 3-15 .Machine Parameter 108 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) for duplex printing cassette.6773 mm). set the margin to the initial setting in Unique Switch 52. Usage/Comments See table on page 3-20. The setting changes by 16 dots (0. after setting this switch. Then. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. Adjusts the start point to print.

6773 mm). Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. Machine Parameter 141 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Machine Parameter 142 ∼ 146 ––– Factory use only 3-16 . Usage/Comments See table on page 3-20. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it.6773 mm). If you want to adjust only left margin. adjust it in this switch. Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. adjust it in this switch. Adjusts the left margin at the 1st cassette for printing. Adjusts the left margin at the 2nd cassette for printing. If you want to adjust only left margin. The setting changes by 16 dots (0.Machine Parameter 140 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Usage/Comments See table on page 3-20. The setting changes by 16 dots (0. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it.

Usage/Comments See table on page 3-20. Adjusts the left margin for duplex printing cassette. Machine Parameter 149 and 159 ––– Factory use only 3-17 . Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to adjust only left margin. adjust it in this switch. If you want to adjust only left margin. Usage/Comments See table on page 3-20.6773 mm).6773 mm). Adjusts the left margin at the Bypass tray for printing. The setting changes by 16 dots (0. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. adjust it in this switch.Machine Parameter 147 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Machine Parameter 148 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. The setting changes by 16 dots (0.

6773 mm). Adjusts the right margin at the 2nd cassette for printing. Adjusts the right margin at the 1st cassette for printing. Usage/Comments See table on page 3-20. Machine Parameter 161 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Machine Parameter 162 ∼ 166 ––– Factory use only 3-18 . Usage/Comments See table on page 3-20. The setting changes by 16 dots (0. Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. adjust it in this switch. If you want to adjust only right margin. The plus setting decreases the right margin and the minus setting increases it.Machine Parameter 160 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to adjust only right margin. The setting changes by 16 dots (0. The plus setting decreases the right margin and the minus setting increases it. adjust it in this switch.6773 mm).

If you want to adjust only right margin.6773 mm). Machine Parameter 169 and 179 ––– Factory use only 3-19 . The setting changes by 16 dots (0. The setting changes by 16 dots (0. Adjusts the right margin at the Bypass tray for printing. Adjusts the right margin for duplex printing cassette.6773 mm). The plus setting decreases the right margin and the minus setting increases it. Usage/Comments See table on page 3-20. adjust it in this switch.Machine Parameter 167 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. Machine Parameter 168 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. If you want to adjust only right margin. Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. Usage/Comments See table on page 3-20. The plus setting decreases the right margin and the minus setting increases it. adjust it in this switch.

74 mm +4.16 mm –10.68 mm 0 mm –0.16 mm +9.81 mm +8.48 mm +8.45 mm –8.45 mm +6.48 mm –10.71 mm –3.36 mm +0.87mm +11.39 mm –4.06 mm +3.77 mm –7.03 mm –2.42 mm –6.06 mm –4.13 mm –8.52 mm +10.77 mm +6.68 mm –1.84 mm +10.71 mm +2.03 mm +1.36 mm –2.42 mm +4.Adjusting the print margin Switch(76543210) 01111111 01111110 01100101 01100110 01011111 01011000 01010010 01001011 01000100 00111101 00110111 0011000 00101001 00010010 00011011 00010101 00001111 00000111 00000000 11110011 11101100 11100101 11011110 11011000 11010001 11001010 11000011 10111101 10110110 10101111 10101000 10100010 10011011 10010100 10010011 10000110 10000000 Settings +12.10 mm +5.87 mm 3-20 .10 mm –6.81 mm –9.39 mm +2.74 mm –5.52 mm –12.13 mm +7.84 mm –11.

Each setting changes by 0. set the margin to the initial setting in Unique Switch 52.6 mm +0. Each setting changes by 0.7 mm +3.Machine Parameter 180 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 1st cassette for printing. after setting this switch. Machine Parameter 182 ∼ 186 ––– Factory use only 3-21 . The plus setting increases the top margin and the minus setting decreases it. Then.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to “0 mm” in Unique Switch 52. Then. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 Settings +12.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to “0 mm” in Unique Switch 52.1 mm.7 mm +3. Adjusts the start point to print. set the margin to the initial setting in Unique Switch 52.2 mm +1.1 mm. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 Settings +12.2 mm +1. after setting this switch. The plus setting increases the top margin and the minus setting decreases it. Adjusts the start point to print.6 mm +0. Machine Parameter 181 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the 2nd cassette for printing.

Each setting changes by 0. Adjusts the start point to print. Each setting changes by 0. The plus setting increases the top margin and the minus setting decreases it.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to “0 mm” in Unique Switch 052. Machine Parameter 189 and 219 ––– Factory use only 3-22 .7 mm +3. Then. Then.8 mm 0 mm Initial setting Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to “0 mm” in Unique Switch 052.2 mm +1.7 mm +3. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 Settings +12.6 mm +0.1 mm. The plus setting increases the top margin and the minus setting decreases it.2 mm +1.1 mm. set the margin to the initial setting in Unique Switch 52.Machine Parameter 187 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) at the Bypass tray for printing. after setting this switch. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 Settings +12. Machine Parameter 188 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment (Vertical) for duplex printing cassette. Adjusts the start point to print.6 mm +0. after setting this switch. set the margin to the initial setting in Unique Switch 52.

adjust it in this switch.7 mm +3.2 mm +1.Machine Parameter 220 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment. If you want to adjust only top margin. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 Settings +12.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. The plus setting increases the top margin and the minus setting decreases it.1 mm.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52.1 mm. Machine Parameter 222 ∼ 226 ––– Factory use only 3-23 .7 mm +3.2 mm +1. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 Settings +12. Each setting changes by 0.6 mm +0. The plus setting increases the top margin and the minus setting decreases it. Adjusts the top margin at the 2nd cassette for printing.6 mm +0. Adjusts the top margin at the 1st cassette for printing. adjust it in this switch. Each setting changes by 0. If you want to adjust only top margin. Machine Parameter 221 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment.

Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 Settings +12. Adjusts the top margin for duplex printing cassette. adjust it in this switch.1 mm. Each setting changes by 0. The plus setting increases the top margin and the minus setting decreases it.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. If you want to adjust only top margin.8 mm 4 mm Initial setting Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52. Switch 127 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 01111111 : 00100000 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 Settings +12. Adjusts the top margin at the Bypass tray for printing. Machine Parameter 228 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment.2 mm +1. adjust it in this switch. The plus setting increases the top margin and the minus setting decreases it.6 mm +0.1 mm.2 mm +1.Machine Parameter 227 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment.7 mm +3.6 mm +0. If you want to adjust only top margin.7 mm +3. Machine Parameter 229 and 239 ––– Factory use only 3-24 . Each setting changes by 0.

If you want to adjust only bottom margin.6 mm –12.8 mm Initial setting 01111111 : 32 steps 00100000 : 16 steps 00010000 : 8 steps 00001000 : 00000000 : –8 steps 11110111 : –16 steps 11101111 : –128 steps 10000000 Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52.6 mm –12.8 mm –1. adjust it in this switch. Adjusts the bottom margin at the 2nd cassette for printing.8 mm 4 mm –0. Switch 127 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +12. adjust it in this switch.2 mm +1. The plus setting decreases the bottom margin and the minus setting increases it. If you want to adjust only bottom margin. Switch 127 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +12.Machine Parameter 240 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment.7 mm +3. Adjusts the bottom margin at the 1st cassette for printing.8 mm –1.8 mm 4 mm –0. Machine Parameter 242 ∼ 246 ––– Factory use only 3-25 .6 mm +0.1 mm. The plus setting decreases the bottom margin and the minus setting increases it. Machine Parameter 241 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment.2 mm +1. Each setting changes by 0.6 mm +0. Each setting changes by 0.8 mm Initial setting 01111111 : 32 steps 00100000 : 16 steps 00010000 : 8 steps 00001000 : 00000000 : –8 steps 11110111 : –16 steps 11101111 : –128 steps 10000000 Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52.1 mm.7 mm +3.

The plus setting increases the top margin and the minus setting decreases it.2 mm +1.8 mm Initial setting 01111111 : 32 steps 00100000 : 16 steps 00010000 : 8 steps 00001000 : 00000000 : –8 steps 11110111 : –16 steps 11101111 : –128 steps 10000000 Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52.8 mm Initial setting 01111111 : 32 steps 00100000 : 16 steps 00010000 : 8 steps 00001000 : 00000000 : –8 steps 11110111 : –16 steps 11101111 : –128 steps 10000000 Note: The surrounding margin (right / left / top / bottom) is set in Unique Switch 52.Machine Parameter 247 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment.6 mm +0. Machine Parameter 248 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Printer registration adjustment.2 mm +1. Adjusts the bottom margin at the Bypass tray for printing.1 mm.1 mm. Adjusts the top margin for duplex printing cassette. Machine Parameter 249 ∼ 284 ––– Factory use only 3-26 . The plus setting decreases the bottom margin and the minus setting increases it. Switch 127 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +12.8 mm 4 mm –0. If you want to adjust only top margin.6 mm –12.7 mm +3.6 mm +0.8 mm –1. Each setting changes by 0.. Switch 127 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings +12. Each setting changes by 0. adjust it in this switch.7 mm +3.8 mm 4 mm –0.8 mm –1. adjust it in this switch. If you want to adjust only bottom margin.6 mm –12.

11 μA –0.11 μA. 3-27 .41 μA +0. Just try to decrease one or two steps at first.11 μA”.88 μA 0 μA Initial setting –0.22 μA –0.88 μA –3. Note: Adjusting them too many steps effect the print quality. it means “ – ”. “10000001” means “–0. adjust this parameter.41 μA –1 steps –2 steps –8 steps –31 steps When Switch 7 is “1”.Machine Parameter 285 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Transfer current adjustment for standard paper front side Usage/Comments When transfer problems occur. For example. 8 steps 00011111 : 00001000 : 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10001000 : 10011111 +3. Switch 76543210 Settings 31 steps The plus setting increases the current and the minus setting decreases it. Each setting changes by 0.

41 μA –1 steps –2 steps –8 steps –31 steps When Switch 7 is “1”.88 μA 0 μA Initial setting –0.88 μA 0 μA Initial setting –0. 8 steps 00011111 : 00001000 : 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10001000 : 10011111 +3. Just try to decrease one or two steps at first.Machine Parameter 286 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Transfer current adjustment for envelops Usage/Comments When transfer problems occur. adjust this parameter.22 μA –0. Switch 76543210 Settings 31 steps The plus setting increases the current and the minus setting decreases it. 8 steps 00011111 : 00001000 : 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10001000 : 10011111 +3.11 μA –0.88 μA –3. “10000001” means “–0. Machine Parameter 287 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Transfer current adjustment for postcards Usage/Comments When transfer problems occur. Each setting changes by 0.11 μA.11 μA”.11 μA”. For example.41 μA +0.11 μA.22 μA –0.41 μA +0. 3-28 . Each setting changes by 0. Note: Adjusting them too many steps effect the print quality. Note: Adjusting them too many steps effect the print quality. adjust this parameter.41 μA –1 steps –2 steps –8 steps –31 steps When Switch 7 is “1”. For example.88 μA –3. “10000001” means “–0. it means “ – ”. Just try to decrease one or two steps at first.11 μA –0. it means “ – ”. Switch 76543210 Settings 31 steps The plus setting increases the current and the minus setting decreases it.

88 μA 0 μA Initial setting –0. Switch 76543210 Settings 31 steps The plus setting increases the current and the minus setting decreases it.11 μA”. Each setting changes by 0.11 μA –0. “10000001” means “–0.41 μA –1 steps –2 steps –8 steps –31 steps When Switch 7 is “1”.Machine Parameter 288 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Transfer current adjustment for transparency sheets (OHP) Usage/Comments When transfer problems occur. For example.88 μA –3.11 μA. “10000001” means “–0. Note: Adjusting them too many steps effect the print quality. Switch 76543210 Settings 31 steps The plus setting increases the current and the minus setting decreases it. Each setting changes by 0. Just try to decrease one or two steps at first. 8 steps 00011111 : 00001000 : 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10001000 : 10011111 +3.41 μA +0. adjust this parameter.41 μA –1 steps –2 steps –8 steps –31 steps When Switch 7 is “1”. it means “ – ”. Machine Parameter 289 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Transfer current adjustment for standard paper back side Usage/Comments When transfer problems occur. 8 steps 00011111 : 00001000 : 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10001000 : 10011111 +3.11 μA –0. Machine Parameter 290 ∼ 459 ––– Factory use only 3-29 . adjust this parameter.11 μA.22 μA –0. Note: Adjusting them too many steps effects the print quality.22 μA –0. it means “ – ”.11 μA”.88 μA –3. For example.41 μA +0.88 μA 0 μA Initial setting –0. Just try to decrease one or two steps at first.

493(common steps for copy steps).Machine Parameter 460 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 Adjust White balance adjustment Copy/Black and white scan mode Resolution: 600x600dpi Document type: Text Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step Usage/Comments 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 460. 3-30 . Darker. Lighter Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step Usage/Comments 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 461. and 492 (ADF only). Machine Parameter 461 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White balance adjustment Copy/Black and white scan mode Resolution: 600x600dpi Document type: Photo/Text Contrast: Dark. Light. 493(common steps for copy steps). and 492 (ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16. However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16.

Machine Parameter 462 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White balance adjustment Copy/Black and white scan mode Resolution: 600x600dpi Document type: Photo/Text Contrast: Normal Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step Usage/Comments 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 462. However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16. and 492 (ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16. Machine Parameter 463 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White balance adjustment Copy/Black and white scan mode Resolution: 600x600dpi Document type: Photo Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step Usage/Comments 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 463. 3-31 . 493(common steps for copy steps). 493(common steps for copy steps). and 492 (ADF only).

However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16. Darker. and 492 (ADF only). and 492 (ADF only). 493(common steps for copy steps). Lighter Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step Usage/Comments 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 465. 3-32 .Machine Parameter 464 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 Adjust White balance adjustment Copy mode Resolution: 600x300dpi Document type: Text Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step Usage/Comments 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 464. However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16. 493(common steps for copy steps). Light. Machine Parameter 465 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White balance adjustment Copy mode Resolution: 600x300dpi Document type: Photo/Text Contrast: Dark.

and 492 (ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16. 493(common steps for copy steps). Machine Parameter 467 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White balance adjustment Copy mode Resolution: 600x300dpi Document type: Photo Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step Usage/Comments 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10000100 : 10000100 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 467.Machine Parameter 466 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White balance adjustment Copy mode Resolution: 600x300dpi Document type: Photo/Text Contrast: Normal Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step Usage/Comments 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 466. However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16. 3-33 . 493(common steps for copy steps). and 492 (ADF only).

Darker. However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16. 200x200dpi Document type: Text Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step Usage/Comments 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 464 and 492 (ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16. 3-34 . Lighter Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step Usage/Comments 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 469 and 492 (ADF only).Machine Parameter 468 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White balance adjustment Black and White scan Resolution: 300x300 dpi. Light. 200x200dpi Document type: Photo/Text Contrast: Dark. Machine Parameter 469 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White balance adjustment Black and White scan Resolution: 300x300 dpi.

However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16. 3-35 . Machine Parameter 471 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White balance adjustment Black and White scan Resolution: 300x300 dpi. 200x200dpi Document type: Photo Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step Usage/Comments 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 471 and 492 (ADF only).Machine Parameter 470 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White balance adjustment Black and White scan Resolution: 300x300 dpi. However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16. 200x200dpi Document type: Photo/Text Contrast: Normal Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step Usage/Comments 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 470 and 492 (ADF only).

However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16. 3-36 .Machine Parameter 472 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White balance adjustment Color scan Resolution: All Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step Usage/Comments 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 472 and 492 (ADF only). Machine Parameter 473 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White balance adjustment Grayscale scan Resolution: All Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step Usage/Comments 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 473 and 492 (ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16.

Machine Parameter 475 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White balance adjustment Fax mode Document type: Gray scale Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step Usage/Comments 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 475 and 492 (ADF only). Super fine Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step Usage/Comments 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 474 and 492 (ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16.Machine Parameter 474 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust White balance adjustment Fax mode Document type: Normal. 3-37 . However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16. Fine.

Machine Parameter 476 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black balance adjustment Copy/Black and white scan mode Resolution: 600x600dpi Document type: Text Switch 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 476 and 494 (ADF only). 3-38 . Darker. Lighter Switch 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 476 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed 64. Machine Parameter 477 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black balance adjustment Copy/Black and white scan mode Resolution: 600x600dpi Document type: Photo/Text Contrast: Dark. However the steps cannot exceed 64. Light.

However the steps cannot exceed 64. Machine Parameter 479 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black balance adjustment Copy/Black and white scan mode Resolution: 600x600dpi Document type: Photo Switch 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 479 and 494 (ADF only). 3-39 .Machine Parameter 478 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Black balance adjustment Copy/Black and white scan mode Resolution: 600x600dpi Document type: Photo/Text Contrast: Normal Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 478 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed 64.

However the steps cannot exceed 64. Darker.Machine Parameter 480 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black balance adjustment Copy mode Resolution: 600x300dpi Document type: Text Switch 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 480 and 494 (ADF only). Lighter Switch 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 481 and 494 (ADF only). 3-40 . Machine Parameter 481 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black balance adjustment Copy mode Resolution: 600x300dpi Document type: Photo/Text Contrast: Dark. Light. However the steps cannot exceed 64.

However the steps cannot exceed 64. Machine Parameter 483 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black balance adjustment Copy mode Resolution: 600x300dpi Document type: Photo Switch 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 482 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed 64.Machine Parameter 482 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Black balance adjustment Copy mode Resolution: 600x300dpi Document type: Photo/Text Contrast: Normal Switch 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 482 and 494 (ADF only). 3-41 .

Light. Darker. However the steps cannot exceed 64. However the steps cannot exceed 64. 3-42 .Machine Parameter 484 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black balance adjustment Black and White scan Resolution: 300x300 dpi. 200x200dpi Document type: Photo/Text Contrast: Dark. Lighter Switch 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 485 and 494 (ADF only). Machine Parameter 485 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black balance adjustment Black and White scan Resolution: 300x300 dpi. 200x200dpi Document type: Text Switch 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 484 and 494 (ADF only).

200x200dpi Document type: Photo/Text Contrast: Normal Switch 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 486 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed 64. Machine Parameter 487 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black balance adjustment Black and White scan Resolution: 300x300 dpi. 3-43 .Machine Parameter 486 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black balance adjustment Black and White scan Resolution: 300x300 dpi. 200x200dpi Document type: Photo Switch 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 487 and 494 (ADF only). However the steps cannot exceed 64.

Light. However the steps cannot exceed 64. However the steps cannot exceed 64. 3-44 . Machine Parameter 489 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black balance adjustment Fax mode Document type: Gray scale Contrast: Dark.Machine Parameter 488 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black balance adjustment Grayscale scan Resolution: All Switch 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 488 and 495 (ADF only). Darker. Lighter Switch 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 489 and 494 (ADF only).

To change the settings for Copy/Scan/Fax mode respectively. 493(copy mode only) and 492. Machine Parameter 491 ––– Factory use only Machine Parameter 492 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Adjust White balance adjustment For ADF scan (common) Copy/Scan/Fax modes Usage/Comments This parameter changes the white balance for ADF scanning for all modes. However the steps cannot exceed 64.Machine Parameter 490 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black balance adjustment Fax mode Document type: Gray scale Contrast: Normal Switch 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step Usage/Comments 76543210 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 489 and 494 (ADF only). 3-45 . However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16. refer to Machine parameters from 460 to 475. Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of each respective Machine parameter.

3-46 . refer to Machine parameters from 460 to 475. However the steps cannot exceed –16 or 16.Machine Parameter 493 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Adjust White balance adjustment For Copy modes and Black and White 600dpi scan mode Usage/Comments This parameter changes the white balance for all copy modes. To change the settings for Copy/Scan/Fax mode respectively. and black and white 600dpi scan mode. 493 and 492 (ADF only). Switch 16 steps 8 steps 4 steps 0 step –4 step –8 step –16step 76543210 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10001000 : 10010000 + Darkest setting Standard Lightest setting The total step is the sum of each respective Machine parameter.

Machine Parameter 494 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black balance adjustment For ADF scan Copy/Scan/Fax modes (For grayscale scan. To change the settings for Copy/Scan/Fax mode respectively. Switch 76543210 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum of each respective Machine parameter and 494. However the steps cannot exceed 64. refer machine parameter 495) Usage/Comments This parameter changes the black balance for ADF scanning for all modes except grayscale scan. 3-47 . refer to Machine parameters from 476 to 489.

To change the settings for FBS scan. refer to Machine parameter 488. 3-48 . However the steps cannot exceed 64.Machine Parameter 495 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Black balance adjustment For ADF scan in grayscale Usage/Comments This parameter changes the black balance for ADF scanning in grayscale. Switch 76543210 64 steps 32 steps 16 steps 8 step 0 step 01000000 : 00100000 : 00001000 : 00000100 : 00000000 + Darkest setting Lightest setting The total step is the sum Machine parameter 488 and 495.

About the white balance and black balance adjustment (Machine parameters 460 to 495) White balance adjustment for FBS : A+B White balance adjustment for ADF : A+B+C Mode Resolution Document type Text Copy/Scan 600x600 Photo/Text Photo Text Copy 600x300 Photo/Text Photo Text Scan 300x300 200x200 ––– Fax ––– Photo/Text Photo Color Grayscale Normal/ Fine/ Super fine Grayscale (–16 steps ≤ A+B ≤ 16 steps) (–16 steps ≤ A+B+C ≤ 16 steps) Contrast ––– Other than Normal Normal ––– ––– Other than Normal Normal ––– ––– Other than Normal Normal ––– ––– ––– ––– ––– Machine parameter for white balance A 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 B C 493 492 (ADF only) Black level adjustment for FBS : A (0 step ≤ A ≤ 64 steps) Black level adjustment for ADF : A+B (0 step ≤ A+B ≤ 64 steps) Document Mode Resolution Contrast type Text Copy/Scan 600x600 Photo/Text Photo Text Copy 600x300 Photo/Text Photo Text 300x300 200x200 Scan ––– Photo/Text Photo Color Grayscale Normal/ Fine/ Super fine Grayscale ––– Other than Normal Normal ––– ––– Other than Normal Normal ––– ––– Other than Normal Normal ––– ––– ––– ––– Other than Normal Normal Machine parameter for black balance A B 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 495 (ADF only) 494 (ADF only) 494 (ADF only) Fax ––– 489 490 3-49 .

Machine Parameter 500 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust PCL Personality Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00000001 00000010 PCL (Initial setting) PCL XL Machine Parameter 501 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Orientation Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00000000 00000001 Portrait (Initial setting) Landscape Machine Parameter 502 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust PCL Paper size Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00000000 00000010 00000011 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001101 00001110 00001111 00010000 00010001 00010100 Letter (Initial setting for US) Legal Executive A4 (Initial setting for Europe) A5 A6 F4 Half Letter COM10 Monarch DL Postcard Custom Machine Parameter 503 ––– Factory use only 3-50 .

Machine Parameter 504 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Paper source Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00000000 00000010 00000011 00000110 Auto (Initial setting) Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Bypass Tray Machine Parameter 505 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Default Media Type Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 Plain (Initial setting) Thick Transparency Envelope/Postcard Machine Parameter 506~507 Factory use only 3-51 .

Machine Parameter 508~509 PCL Default Font Number Switch 508 76543210 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010000 00010001 01000000 01000001 01000010 01100000 01100000 01100000 01100000 01100010 01110000 01110000 11110000 11110000 01111010 10110000 10110000 00001011 509 76543210 00000011 00000101 00000110 00010001 00010100 00010111 00011111 00101100 00110100 01001000 01100101 11001001 00001010 11011010 00101110 00000101 00000011 00000100 00001111 00101111 00000101 01010000 01100010 01010000 01001101 10101010 00101011 00101101 00101110 Usage/Comments Courier (Initial setting) CG Times Letter Gothic CG Omega Coronet Nw Cent Schlbk IT CA vant Gard Clarendon Univers Antiq Olive Garamond Marigold Albertus Arial Symbol Times New Rmn Courier PS Helvetica Palation ITC Bookman Times Mincho Gothic P. Mincho P. Gothic Winding Zapf Chancery Zapf Dingbats Symbol PC Note: The invalid combination of font number and symbols are on page 3-54. 3-52 .

1 Latin 1 Note: The invalid combination of font number and symbols are on page 3-54. Machine Parameter 512~515 ––– Factory use only 3-53 .1 Latin 2 PC– 1004 PC– 8 TK.Machine Parameter 510~511 PCL Default Symbol Switch 510 76543210 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000001 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 00000010 511 76543210 00000100 00001001 00001110 00010011 00010101 00100101 00100110 00100111 00110101 01001110 01011110 10101101 10101110 10110100 11001010 11001110 11101010 00001101 00010101 00100101 00101010 00110100 00110101 01001010 01010101 01110101 10001010 10010101 11001100 11110101 00110101 01001110 01101011 01101100 01101101 01110101 Usage/Comments ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian ISO 15: Italian ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 ISO 11: Swedish ISO 6: ASC ll ISO 4: United Kingdom ISO 69: French ISO 21: German Legal ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 ISO 17: Spanish PS Math ISO 8859/5 Latin 5 Windows 3.1 Baltic Symbol Windows 3.0 Latin 1 Ps Text PC– 8 Cord Page 437 (Initial setting) PC– 8 D/N.1j Latin Windows 3.1 Latin 5 Microsoft Publishing ISO 8859/6 Latin6 Desk Top Math– 8 Roman– 8 Windows 3. Cord Page 437N Macintosh PC– 850 Multilingual HP 4000 ITC Zapf Dingbats PI Font PC– 852 Latin 2 ISO 8859/1 Latin1 Windows 3. Code Page 437T Windows 3.

0 Latin 1 PS Text PC–8 Code Page 437 PC–8 D/N.1j Latin Windows 3.1 Latin 5 Microsoft Publishing ISO 8859/6 Latin 6 DeskTop Math–8 Roman–8 Windows 3.Invalid combination of font number and symbols Courier CG Times LetterGothic CG Omega Coronet NwCentSchlbk ITCAvantGard Clarendon Univers AntiqOlive Garamond ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian ISO 15: Italian ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 ISO 11: Swedish ISO 6: ASCII ISO 4: United Kingdom ISO 69: French ISO 21: German Legal ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 ISO 17: Spanish PSMath ISO 8859/5 Latin 5 Windows 3. Code Page 437T Windows 3.1 Latin 2 PC–1004 PC–8 TK. Mincho P. Gothic Windings ZapfChancery Zapf Dingbats SymbolPS Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid 3-54 .1 Baltic Symbol Windows 3.1 Latin 1 PC–775 Windings Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Marigold Albertus Arial Symbol TimesNewRmn CourierPS Helvetica Palatino ITCBookman Times Mincho Gothic P. Code Page 437N Macintosh PC–850 Multilingual HP4000 ITC ZapfDingbats PI Font PC–852 Latin 2 ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 Windows 3.

Machine Parameter 516 ~ 517 PCL X Resolution Switch 516 76543210 00000001 00000010 517 76543210 00101100 01011000 Usage/Comments 300 dpi 600 dpi (Initial setting) Machine Parameter 518 ~ 519 PCL Y Resolution Switch 518 76543210 00000001 00000010 519 76543210 00101100 01011000 Usage/Comments 300 dpi 600 dpi (Initial setting) Machine Parameter 520 ~ 521 PCL Time–out period Switch 520 76543210 00000000 00000000 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000001 : 00000001 : 00000011 : 11111111 521 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 : 01100100 : 11001000 : 00101100 : 11110100 : 00100000 : 111111111 Usage/Comments Invalid 1 sec 2 sec : 100 sec : 200 sec : 300 sec (Initial setting) : 500 sec : 800 sec : 65535 sec 3-55 .

Machine Parameter 522~523 PCL Print copies Switch 522 76543210 00000000 00000000 00000000 : 00000011 523 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 : 11100111 Usage/Comments Invalid 1 copy (Initial setting) 2 copies : 999 copies Machine Parameter 524 ~ 525 PCL Time–out period (Text–mode) Switch 524 76543210 00000000 00000000 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000001 : 00000001 : 11111111 525 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 : 00001010 : 01100100 : 11001000 : 00101100 : 11110100 : 111111111 Usage/Comments Invalid 1 sec 2 sec : 10 sec (Initial setting) : 100 sec : 200 sec : 300 sec : 500 sec : 65535 sec Machine Parameter 526 ~ 531 ––– Factory use only 3-56 .

0 characters/inch (Initial setting) : 11.0 characters/inch : 10.7 point Machine Parameter 538 ~ 539 Factory use only 3-57 .5 characters/inch : 9.Machine Parameter 532 ~ 533 PCL Characters per inch Switch 532 76543210 00000000 : 00000000 00000000 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000000 : 00000011 533 76543210 00000000 : 00000011 00000100 00000101 : 01011010 : 01100100 : 01101110 : 11100111 Usage/Comments Invalid : Invalid 0.4 characters/inch 0.9 characters/inch Machine Parameter 534 ~ 535 Factory use only Machine Parameter 536 ~ 537 PCL Size of Characters Switch 536 76543210 00000000 00000000 : 0000000 : 00000000 : 0100111 537 76543210 00000000 00000001 : 01100100 : 01111000 : 00001101 Usage/Comments Invalid 0.0 point (Initial setting) : 999.1 point : 10.0 characters/inch : 99.0 point : 12.

Machine Parameter 540 Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust PJL Response (for AS400) 0: Disable 1: Enable Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only End–Off–Line Text Wrap 0: Enable 1: Disable Usage/Comments 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Machine Parameter 541 ~ 543 Factory use only Machine Parameter 544 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Line per page (1 line/page) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00000000 00000001 : 00000100 00000101 : 10000000 60 lines (Letter)(Initial setting) Invalid Invalid 5 lines 128 lines Machine Parameter 545 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust PCL Main Paper Source Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 00000000 00000010 00000011 00000110 Cassette 1 (Initial setting) Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Bypass Tray 3-58 .

Machine Parameter 546 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Line Terminate Usage/Comments Switch 1 0 00 01 10 00 CR=CR. FF=CR–FF CR=CR–LF. FF=FF CR=CR–LF. LF=LF. LF=CR–LF. FF=CR–FF Machine Parameter 547 ~ 999 Factory use only 3-59 . FF=FF CR=CR. LF=CR–LF. LF=LF.

<1>. Note: You can confirm the initial setting of each Memory Switch by the Memory Switches List. or by pressing the numeric keypad. or < > or < >. The memory switches will reset to factory defaults. Set Memory Switch / /Enter 2. See “3. The memory switch List will be printed by pressing <Menu>. If you want to set other memory switches. Press <Enter>. 3. Select Memory Switch 00:00000000 4. <0>.2 Clearing the Memory Switches Resets the memory switches to factory defaults.1 Setting the Memory Switches These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. Press <Enter>. repeat step 3–5. Press <Enter>.3.26 Multi Line Settings” on page 3-146 for the setting. Press < > or < > of the cursor key to move the cursor. Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad. <1>. < >. Call up the desired switch by pressing < > or < >. Note: To finish the operation without clearing the memory switches. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby. press <Menu>. 1. From standby. press <Cancel>. 7. About the “ ” symbol at the list The “ ” at the list indicates that you can set the switch respectively for the second phone line. <0>. • • • • 76543210 5. 3-60 . To navigate through the memory switch settings: The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right). press <Menu>. to change the bit value.<0>. 4.3 Memory Switch Adjustment 3. Otherwise. Press <Enter>. Clear Memory Switch Yes → Enter 3. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby. <1>. <*>. The primary back up battery maintains these settings if power are lost. 01:01010000 00000011 Bit No. proceed to step 7. Clear Memory Switch / /Enter 2. 3.<*>. 6. From standby. Press <Enter> to save the setting of the displayed memory switch and return to the memory switch edit screen. 1. • Press <Reset> not to save the setting of the displayed memory switch.3.3. <*>.

the machine always dials a given number of seconds after going off–hook. the machine checks for dial tone and acts according to the setting of memory switch 00. bit 1.Memory Switch 00 – Dialer Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only CED detection condition Usage/Comments Sets whether the detection should be strict or not. When set to PBX. Determines if the machine proceeds with dialing or indicates an error if no dial tone is detected within five seconds of going off–hook. Memory switch 001 sets the number of seconds. 3-61 . Normal Strict 350ms 500ms 700ms 1000ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Switch 5 4 3 0 2 1 1 1 0 0 DIS detect time after dialing 0: 55 sec 1: 70 sec CED detection 0: No 1: Yes Dial tone detection 0: Do not dial 1: Dial Phone line type for the first phone line 0: PSTN 1: PBX Sets the time DIS signal is detected after dialing a number. Can be use to ignore CED detection if noise on the telephone line is mistaken as a 2100 Hz CED signal. When set to PSTN.

Memory Switch 01 – Dialer Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only DIS detection condition Usage/Comments Sets whether the detection should be strict or not. Switch 3 2 1 0 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Pause time 0 sec 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec Initial setting 4 sec 5 sec 6 sec 7 sec 8 sec 9 sec 10 sec 11 sec 12 sec 13 sec 14 sec 15 sec 3-62 . Normal Strict 200ms 300ms 400ms 500ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 1 1 PBX mode dial pause Sets the number of seconds the machine waits before dialing when memory switch 002. bit 0 is set to PBX mode.

Memory Switch 03 – Factory use only Memory Switch 04 – Dialer Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only DTMF attenuation Usage/Comments See table below Note: The setting of this switch is available only when setting other than 0. the machine does not auto-redial to the remote machine when the remote unit did not answer the call within the incoming detection time (D. Memory Switch 04…DTMF attenuation Switch 3 2 1 0 –15 dB 1 1 1 1 –14 dB 1 1 1 0 –13 dB 1 1 0 1 –12 dB 1 1 0 0 –11 dB 1 0 1 1 –10 dB 1 0 1 0 –9 dB 1 0 0 1 –8 dB 1 0 0 0 –7 dB 0 1 1 1 –6 dB 0 1 1 0 –5 dB 0 1 0 1 –4 dB 0 1 0 0 –3 dB 0 0 1 1 –2 dB 0 0 1 0 –1 dB 0 0 0 1 –0 dB 0 0 0 0 3-63 .7 error).0.0.7 error occurred 0 : Yes 1 : No Usage/Comments [This Switch is for US only] When this switch is set to “1”.Memory Switch 02 – Dialer Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (EUR) 1 (US) Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Redial when D.

the unit will not check the frequency of the incoming CI signal. Incoming calls are answered according to this setting regardless of the number of rings chosen in the User Settings. Memory Switch 06 ∼09 – Factory use only 3-64 . the machine is able to auto answer an incoming ring with an off time of 120 – 60 ms. 3 0 Number of CI signal detection in Fax/Tel Ready mode 0: Detect 1 time 1: Detect 2 times 2 0 1 0 0 1 Dual ring detection 0: No 1: Yes Long ring detection 0: No 1: Yes Frequency of the CI signal detection 0: No 1: Yes When enabled. Allows the machine to respond to an incoming ring if the ring on time is longer than two seconds.) Switch 6 5 4 0 0 0 100 ms 0 0 1 200 ms 0 1 0 300 ms 0 1 1 400 ms 1 0 0 500 ms 1 0 1 600 ms 1 1 0 700 ms 1 1 1 800 ms Select the number of detection time of CI signal in the Fax/Tel Ready mode or in the ringer silent mode. (Fax/Tel Ready mode only.Memory Switch 05 – Dialer Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 1 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Ring signal detect time Usage/Comments Set the time that an incoming ring will not be detected after hanging up. When disabled.

29 Echo Protect tone International telephone lines equipped with echo 0: No suppression will cut the beginning portion of the 1: Yes transmitted information which may cause the receiver not to receive the training and data.2 9.4 4.Memory Switch 10 – Transmission Switch 7 Initial Setting 1 Adjust Usage/Comments Busy tone detection Set this switch to “0” if the ring tone of remote unit is 0: No mistaken for a busy signal.8 19. Maximum transmit speed (kbps) 2. Also ignores the first DIS 1: Yes signal and transmits the DCS signal in response to the second DIS signal.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 2 1 0 1 1 0 1 3-65 . 1: Yes Fallback pattern (bps) 2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 14400 Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times Set at 1: 4 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times Overseas mode Re–enables echo suppression that is disabled by 0: No the CED signal (2100 Hz).8 7. a 0.2 33. To protect the received image from degrading.2 21.4 28.5 second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the training using G3 high–speed modem training (V. V.8 31.6 12 14.4 16.29).6 24 26.

increase the interval between CFR and data transmission using this switch. 4 0 75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms Switch 5 0 0 1 1 Switch 4 0 1 0 1 Output attenuation See table below *default setting : Switch US 3 1 2 0 1 0 0 1 5 0 3 2 1 0 * * * * EUR 1 0 0 0 Memory Switch 11 – Output attenuation Switch 3 2 1 0 –15 dB 1 1 1 1 –14 dB 1 1 1 0 –13 dB 1 1 0 1 –12 dB 1 1 0 0 –11 dB 1 0 1 1 –10 dB 1 0 1 0 –9 dB 1 0 0 1 –8 dB 1 0 0 0 –7 dB 0 1 1 1 –6 dB 0 1 1 0 –5 dB 0 1 0 1 –4 dB 0 1 0 0 –3 dB 0 0 1 1 –2 dB 0 0 1 0 –1 dB 0 0 0 1 –0 dB 0 0 0 0 3-66 .Memory Switch 11 – Transmission Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Usage/Comments The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data When CFR and data overlap due to line echo. 6 1 250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms Switch 7 0 0 1 1 Switch 6 0 1 0 1 Interval between DCS and TCF When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo. increase the interval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch.

and number of pages To set the individually transmission of them. retransmission disables automatically if receiving RTN/PIN signals. transmission of the TTI is disabled. 6 0 5 0 When set at “1”.34 transmission 0: Yes 1: No CSI/TSI/CIG transmit 0: Yes 1: No ECM mode 0: On 1: Off Retransmit automatically when receiving RTN/PIN signals 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments During the V8 handshake. 1: 400 ms Interval between DIS and DCS 0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Switch 1 Switch 0 Memory Switch 13 – Transmission Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust ANSam detection 0: Yes 1: No V. 4 1 2 0 1 0 0 0 ECM response time 0: 3 sec 1: 4. TSI and CIG signals are disabled. ECM mode reduces document memory and may lengthen transmission and reception times. or vice versa. When set at “0”. The time limit to receive the response signal for the ECM post message.34 transmission. Individual setting for V. the machine changes the date format of the transmitted TTI from MM:DD:YY. 4 0 3 0 2 1 0 1 0 0 Memory Switch 14 – Factory use only 3-67 .) 3 0 Usage/Comments When set to “1”. Determines ECM mode. When set to “1”. The TTI includes the followings: • Sender name • Sender’s fax number • Data & time.Memory Switch 12 – Transmission Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Changing the date format of the transmitted TTI 0: No 1: Yes TTI transmit 0: No 1: Yes (Note: Turning TTI transmission off may violate local or federal regulations. transmission of the CSI. set to “1”.8 sec ECM error retransmit time The time limit before the ECM error is 0: 200 ms retransmitted. see Memory Switc 16. if some noise disturbs the handshake and an error occurs.

Memory Switch 16 – Transmission Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Additional data on TTI transmit 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments 2 1 Subscriber ID transmit 0: No 1: Yes 1 1 TTI (name) transmit 0: No 1: Yes When set at “0”. 0 0 Factory use only Memory Switch 17 ∼ 19 – Factory use only 3-68 . bit 4 and/or Memory switch 13. When set at “0”. bit 5 is available.) 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 Cancel redial if T.1 or T. the machine will not retry the transmission.4. etc) is disabled. Note: This switch is available only when Memory switch 12.4. bit 5 is available. the transmission of the additional data (time. bit 5 is available.1 or T. bit 4 and/or Memory switch 13.4. an error will occur because RTC will not be sent at the end of a canceled transmission. Sets action after receiving PPR four times at 2400 bps. When set at “0”.4. if a T. file number.Memory Switch 15 – Transmission Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Program individual autodialer attributes 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Sending RTC signal when transmission is canceled 0: Yes 1: No Usage/Comments Allows individual setting of memory switches 10 as attribute 1. Note: This switch is available only when Memory switch 12. (Refer to page 3-84 for settings.4 error occurs. the transmission of the name that is stored in the unit is disabled.4 error occurs 0: Yes 1: No Action after EOR signal 0: Continue 1: Discontinue RTC signal is sent at the end of the transmission. the transmission of the subscriber ID is disabled. 11 as attribute 2. When set at “1”. the number of pages. Note: This switch is available only when Memory switch 012. bit 4 and/or Memory switch 13. When set at “0”. the machine will send the RTC if the transmission is canceled. 12 as attribute 3 and 13 as attribute 4 when one–touch and speed dial locations are programmed. When set at “0”. No error will occur.

the machine prints the data even though the following protocol is not succeeded.2 33.4 28.8 31. When set to "1". 100 ms 500 ms 800 ms 1200 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Switch 1 Switch 0 Memory Switch 22 ––– Factory use only 3-69 . 6 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 Factory use only Factory use only Receive speed (kbps) Maximum receive speed may be slowed to compensate for poor phone lines. which allows echo suppression to restart.4 4.8 7.2 9. Setting this bit to “1”. the paper will be cut when the length reached to 3m. 1 0 0 1 Adjusts the delay between detection of training/TCF and sending of CFR.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Memory Switch 21 – Reception Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 0 Adjust Not used DIS “inch” declaration 0: No 1: Yes Paper size limitation 0: No limit 1: 3m T1 timer 0: 35 sec 1: 20 sec Print image data when post message is not received after receiving RTC signal 0: No 1: Yes DIS/DTC Extend field Transmit 0: Yes 1: No(Tx until Bit No. If the received document includes the RTC. A 2100 Hz CED signal disables echo suppression in some telephone equipment.8 19. After the machine dials the remote machine’s phone number.24 of DIS/DTC) G3 echo receive Usage/Comments 5 0 4 0 3 1 This will limit the paper length of the received document.2 21.6 24 26.Memory Switch 20 – Reception Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Data error rate 0: 10% 1: 20% Pause one second after sending CED 0: No (75 ms) 1: Yes (1 sec) Usage/Comments Determines the allowable number of erred lines out of total lines received in a document. 2 0 Setting this switch to “1” will disable ITU– T superfine mode. 2. Adjusts the T1 time–out.4 16.6 12 14. the machine pauses one second after sending CED. it begins sending CNG and waits this amount of time before disconnecting the line. This may help with problematic overseas reception.

0 0 3-70 .34 reception.Memory Switch 23 – Reception Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 0 Adjust Factory use only V.34 reception 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments Individual setting for V.000 bit/s. 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Memory Switch 24 ∼ 29 ––– Factory use only Memory Switch 30 – Modem Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 1 0 Adjust Number of HDLC end flags Usage/Comments Defines the number of HDLC end flags. become efficient for the line short break.400 or 12. but become weak for the line noise. It’s available only for communication at 14. Switch 7 6 5 4 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Factory use only Factory use only Digital cable equalizer 0: Free 1: Hold No use 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Initial setting 3 2 1 0 0 0 When set to “1”.

bits 0–3 and memory switch 31. Set at 0: Line condition status (EYE–Q) is not checked after checking TCF. 6 1 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 Strict – – – – – – – – – – – –Lenient 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Strict – – – – – – – – – – – –Lenient 0 1 0 1 3-71 . bits 0–7 and enables EYE–Q check adjustment.Memory Switch 31 – Modem Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Adjust EYE–Q check level at 7200 bps EYE–Q check level at 9600 bps EYE–Q check level at 12000 bps EYE–Q check level at 14400 bps Usage/Comments 0 0 1 1 Strict–– – – – – – – – – – – –Lenient 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Strict – – – – – – – – – – – –Lenient 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Strict – – – – – – – – – – – –Lenient 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Strict – – – – – – – – – – – –Lenient 0 1 0 1 Memory Switch 32 – Modem Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust EYE–Q slice level 0: Disable 1: Enable Check EYE–Q 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only EYE–Q check level at 2400 bps EYE–Q check level at 4800 bps Usage/Comments Setting this bit to “1” enables memory switch 32. Set at 1: Line condition status (EYE–Q) is checked after checking TCF.

3 seconds to 10 seconds after detecting pre–amble. Setting this switch to “1” extend HDLC frame receive timer in FSK from 3.Memory Switch 33 – Modem Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Delete receive echo of CFR at the receiver side 0: No 1: Yes Expand FSK receive time after detecting flag 0: 3.3 seconds 1: 10 seconds Usage/Comments Modem will be opened only in high–speed mode. Sets this switch to “1” to resolve the problem caused of the echo of CFR. 0 0 Memory Switch 34 ∼ 39 ––– Factory use only 3-72 .

Set this switch to “0” to avoid this.6 meters 1: 1 meter Usage/Comments Setting to unlimited will override document jam sensing. Determines if DTMF tones are produced through the handset in off–hook dialing. phone line noise may occur as the CML relay switches on and off. Memory Switch 41 ∼ 59 ––– Factory use only Memory Switch 60 – Remote reception Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 1 Adjust Factory use only CML relay off time after dialing 0: 1 sec 1: 200 ms DTMF tones heard through handset 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments When dialing from the keypad. 5 0 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 3-73 .Memory Switch 40 – Scanner Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Document TX length limit 0: 3.

Memory Switch 61 – Remote reception Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Off-hook / on-hook detect time Usage/Comments Sets the time interval between the on-hook and offhook (or off-hook/on-hook) condition. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 0000 0 ms 0001 100 ms 0010 200 ms 0011 300 ms 0100 400 ms Initial setting 0101 500 ms 0110 600 ms 0111 700 ms 1000 800 ms 1001 900 ms 1 0 1 0 1000 ms 1 0 1 1 1100 ms 1 1 0 0 1200 ms 1 1 0 1 1300 ms 1 1 1 0 1400 ms 1 1 1 1 1500 ms 3-74 .

If the switch hook is quickly depressed and released. switch-to-fax will occur.Memory Switch 62 – Remote reception Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only CNG detect in Ans/Fax ready 0: No 1: Yes Switch-hook time Usage/Comments When set to “1”. This setting adjusts how quickly the switch hook activation must be. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 0000 0 ms 0001 100 ms 0010 200 ms 0011 300 ms Initial setting 0100 400 ms 0101 500 ms 0110 600 ms 0111 700 ms 1000 800 ms 1001 900 ms 1 0 1 0 1000 ms 1 0 1 1 1100 ms 1 1 0 0 1200 ms 1 1 0 1 1300 ms 1 1 1 0 1400 ms 1 1 1 1 1500 ms 3 2 1 0 0 0 1 1 3-75 . the machine detects the CNG signal in Ans/Fax ready.

Memory Switch 63 – Remote reception and TAD interface Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Adjust silent detection time Usage/Comments This switch adjusts the length of silence required for silent detection activation. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 0000 0 sec 0001 10 sec 0010 20 sec 0011 30 sec 0100 40 sec 0101 50 sec 0110 60 sec Initial setting 0111 70 sec 1000 80 sec 1001 90 sec 1 0 1 0 100 sec 1 0 1 1 110 sec 1 1 0 0 120 sec 1 1 0 1 130 sec 1 1 1 0 140 sec 1 1 1 1 150 sec 6 1 5 0 4 1 3 0 Number of seconds silent detection remains active 2 1 1 1 0 0 3-76 . Switch 7 6 5 4 Time 0000 0 sec 0001 1 sec 0010 2 sec 0011 3 sec 0100 4 sec 0101 5 sec Initial setting 0110 6 sec 0111 7 sec 1000 8 sec 1001 9 sec 1010 10 sec 1011 11 sec 1100 12 sec 1101 13 sec 1110 14 sec 1111 15 sec This switch adjusts the length of time silence detection remains active.

bit 4-7) 3-77 . bit 0-3) Silent detection time (Adjusted by Memory switch 63. bit 4-7) Silent detection is active (Adjusted by Memory switch 63.Memory Switch 64 – Remote reception and TAD interface Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust CNG detect period after TAD begins recording ICM Usage/Comments Sets the period during which CNG is detected after the TAD begins recording incoming message. Switch 7 6 5 4 Time 0000 0 sec 0001 10 sec 0010 20 sec 0011 30 sec Initial setting 0100 40 sec 0101 50 sec 0110 60 sec 0111 70 sec 1000 80 sec 1001 90 sec 1 0 1 0 100 sec 1 0 1 1 110 sec 1 1 0 0 120 sec 1 1 0 1 130 sec 1 1 1 0 140 sec 1 1 1 1 150 sec Sets the period during which CNG is detected after the TAD answers an incoming call. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 0000 0 sec 0001 10 sec Initial setting 0010 20 sec 0011 30 sec 0100 40 sec 0101 50 sec 0110 60 sec 0111 70 sec 1000 80 sec 1001 90 sec 1 0 1 0 100 sec 1 0 1 1 110 sec 1 1 0 0 120 sec 1 1 0 1 130 sec 1 1 1 0 140 sec 1 1 1 1 150 sec 6 0 5 1 4 1 3 0 CNG detect period after TAD answers 2 0 1 0 0 1 Incoming rings TAD plays Outgoing message CNG detection is active (Adjusted by Memory switch 64. bit 0-3) TAD records Incoming message CNG detection is active (Adjusted by Memory switch 64.

Memory Switch 66 ∼ 69 – Factory use only 3-78 . Switch 7 6 5 4 3 11111 11101 : 01001 00111 00101 00011 00000 00010 00100 00110 01000 : 11100 11110 Factory use only Factory use only Beep if fax handset hang up 0: Yes 1: No Time 150 msec 140 msec : 40 msec 30 msec 20 msec 10 msec 0 msec Initial setting –10 msec –20 msec –30 msec –40 msec : –140 msec –150 msec 2 1 0 0 0 0 Determines if your machine beeps when having left the fax’s handset hanging up after communication.Memory Switch 65 – Remote reception Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of CI detect time Usage/Comments Sets the time added to or reduced from the CI detect time.

In the event of two power losses in a 40–hour period. documents will be lost. a check message can be printed if a communication error occurs. 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 0 3-79 . For easy identification.Memory Switch 70 – Operation Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Display error line 0: No 1: Yes Tonal line monitor 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Sort autodialer printout 0: Sort by autodialer location 1: Sort by location ID Print check message if power is lost 0: No 1: Yes Print page if error occurs during memory transmission 0: No 1: Yes Print check message 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments The number of error lines contained in the received data will be shown in the LCD. 6 0 5 4 0 0 Specifies how entries on autodialer printouts are sorted. When power is restored. Allows fax communication to be heard through the monitor speaker. the first page of a document stored for memory transmission will print along a check message if an error occurs during memory transmission. To notify the user of an error. a check message will print.

… When some broadcast transmissions were NG.Memory Switch 71 – Operation Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Print TCR with the original page during memory transmission when the result is NG 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Print TCR with the original page during memory transmission when the result is OK 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Display modem speed 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments For easy identification. the first page of a document stored for memory transmission will print along a TCR when the transmission result is NG. 2 1 0 0 0 0 The transmit/receive speed is displayed in the LCD. 0 1 Memory Switch 73 ~ 89 – Factory use only 3-80 . … When all broadcast transmissions were OK. … When Memory transmission was NG. … 0 0 No No No No 1 No Yes No Yes 0 Yes No Yes No 1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Memory Switch 72 – Operation Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Erase polled document 0: No 1: Yes Print TCR after the batch transmission 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments Determines if a document stored for polling is erased after being polled. Memory switch71 … Print TCR with the original page Switch 3 Switch 5 When Memory transmission was OK. the first page of a document stored for memory transmission will print along a TCR when the transmission result is OK. 4 3 0 1 For easy identification. Determines if printing the confirmation report after completing the batch transmission.

Memory Switch 90 ~ 96 – Factory use only Memory Switch 097 – Other functions Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 1 1 Adjust Day light saving time (Summer time) start month Usage/Comments This switch sets the month when the daylight saving time (summer time) begins. Switch 7 6 5 4 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 Day light saving time (Summer time) start week Time March January February March Initial setting April May June July August September October November December 3 2 1 0 This switch sets the month when the daylight saving time (summer time) begins. Start day light saving from Sunday 1:00 of Switch 3 2 1 0 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 Time the last week the first week the second week (US initial) the third week the fourth week the last week of the month (European initial) 3-81 .

End day light saving from Sunday 1:00 of Switch 3 2 1 0 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 Time the last week the first week (US initial) the second week the third week the fourth week the last week of the month (European initial) Memory Switch 99 –Factory use only 3-82 . Switch 7 6 5 4 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 Day light saving time (Summer time) end week Time March January February March April May June July August September October November December Initial setting 3 2 1 0 This switch sets the month when the daylight saving time (summer time) ends.Memory Switch 098 ––– Other functions Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 1 0 1 0 Adjust Day light saving time (Summer time) end month Usage/Comments This switch sets the month when the daylight saving time (summer time) ends.

Press <Enter>. from standby. and reset the memory switches and machine parameters to factory defaults. see the next page. Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization. Therefore. etc. For information on the All RAM Clear setting. To clear programmed data and user settings. etc. <2>. Subscriber ID. memory switches and unique switches. press <Menu>. <0>. press <Cancel>. are stored in the unit’s Random Access Memory (RAM). date. when the power is lost.4 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings User programmed information such as autodialer entries. time. <*>. 3-60 and 3-89. the All RAM Clear setting can be used to erase all users programmed information. this setting is useful to reset the user-programmed information but leave specific parameters and switches configured for a particular telephone system. 1. A battery back up holes this information. This function does not clear the machine parameters.3. all documents in memory. Note: If desired. 3-83 .. Transmit Terminal Identifier (TTI). see page 3-3. Clear User Settings Yes → Enter 2. To reset only each switch.

(See setting 3. To change a setting. one– touch and speed dial listings to help in reprogramming this information.5 All RAM Clear The All RAM Clear setting will erase all user programmed information. 76543210 3. 12 and 13. To perform an All RAM Clear. press <Menu>. bit 7 to “1”. As a one-touch or speed dial location is programmed. When the function is enabled. press < > or < until the cursor is below the desired bit position.3. see “Clearing the machine parameters. If you need to clear them. 4. 11. and reset the memory switches to factory defaults. 1.” page 3-3 or “Clear Life Monitor. the fax will advance to the next autodialer programming steps. If possible.1 Setting the Memory Switches for more information on changing memory switch 15. Set the individual bit positions as shown in the following table. from standby. an “Attribute” option is added to the autodialer programming steps. Change memory switch 15.” page 3-141. it is advisable to print the machine settings.) 2. an extra step showing Attribute 1. 5. then press <1> or <0> to make the change. 6. > 3-84 . To set the individual attributes: 1. <3>. Note: The All RAM Clear does not clear the machine parameters. Note: To finish the operation without performing RAM clear. <0>. life monitor and consumable order sheet. <*>. and Attribute 4 are added as the last step. To set other attributes.3. When the last attribute is set. Press <Enter>. 01:Attribute1 10001101 Bit No. Press <Enter> to save the setting of the displayed attribute and advance to the next attribute.6 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes This function allows the user to configure an individual one–touch or speed dial entry with the settings shown in Memory Switches 10. 3. repeat steps 3-4. all documents in memory. Attribute 3. when the All RAM Clear is used to reset a malfunction or lock up. press <Cancel>. All RAM Clear Yes → Enter 2. This feature may also be used to try and clear a machine malfunction or lock up. Attribute 2.

4 4. 1: Yes Fallback pattern (bps) 2400 4800 7200 9600 14400 Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times Set at 1: 4 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times Overseas mode Re–enables echo suppression that is disabled by 0: No the CED signal (2100 Hz).2 21.6 24 26.29 Echo Protect tone International telephone lines equipped with echo 0: No suppression will cut the beginning portion of the 1: Yes transmitted information which may cause the receiver not to receive the training and data.29).6 12 14.2 33. Maximum transmit speed (kbps) 2.5 second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the training using G3 high–speed modem training (V.4 16.8 19.8 31.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 2 1 0 1 1 0 1 3-85 . V. To protect the received image from degrading.2 9. Also ignores the first DIS 1: Yes signal and transmits the DCS signal in response to the second DIS signal.Attribute 1 – Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 10) Switch 7 Initial Setting 1 Adjust Usage/Comments Busy tone detection Sets this switch to “0” if the ring tone of remote unit 0: No is mistaken for a busy signal.4 28.8 7. a 0.

increase the interval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch. 4 0 Switch 5 Switch 4 3 2 1 0 * * * * 75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 See table below 5 0 Output attenuation Output attenuation when individual autodialer attributes are set. increase the interval between CFR and data transmission using this switch. 6 1 250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms Switch 7 0 0 1 1 Switch 6 0 1 0 1 Interval between DCS and TCF When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo. Switch 3 2 1 0 –15 dB 1 1 1 1 –14 dB 1 1 1 0 –13 dB 1 1 0 1 –12 dB 1 1 0 0 –11 dB 1 0 1 1 –10 dB 1 0 1 0 –9 dB 1 0 0 1 –8 dB 1 0 0 0 –7 dB 0 1 1 1 –6 dB 0 1 1 0 –5 dB 0 1 0 1 –4 dB 0 1 0 0 –3 dB 0 0 1 1 –2 dB 0 0 1 0 –1 dB 0 0 0 1 –0 dB 0 0 0 0 3-86 .Attribute 2 – Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 11) Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Usage/Comments The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data When CFR and data overlap due to line echo.

When set at “0”. 1: 400 ms Interval between DIS and DCS 0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Switch 1 Switch 0 3-87 . and number of pages To set the individually transmission of them.8 sec ECM error retransmit time The time limit before the ECM error is 0: 200 ms retransmitted. The time limit to receive the response signal for the ECM post message. or vice versa.Attribute 3 – Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 12) Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Changing the date format of the transmitted TTI 0: No 1: Yes TTI transmit 0: No 1: Yes (Note: Turning TTI transmission off may violate local or federal regulations. see Memory SW 016. The TTI includes the followings: • Sender name • Sender’s fax number • Data & time.) 3 0 Usage/Comments When set to “1”. 4 1 2 0 1 0 0 0 ECM response time 0: 3 sec 1: 4. the machine changes the date format of the transmitted TTI from MM: DD: YY. transmission of the TTI is disabled.

When set to “1”.34 transmission. ECM mode reduces document memory and may lengthen transmission and reception times. set to “1”. 5 4 0 0 3 0 Determines ECM mode. retransmission disables automatically if receiving RTN/PIN signals. if some noise disturbs the handshake and an error occurs. 6 0 Individual setting for V.Attribute 4 – Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 13) Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust ANSam detection 0: Yes 1: No V.34 transmission 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only ECM mode 0: On 1: Off Retransmit automatically when receiving RTN/PIN signals 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments During the V8 handshake. 2 1 0 1 0 0 3-88 .

<*>. Press <Enter>. 7. If you want to set other unique switches. <0>.7 Unique Switch Adjustment 3. Select Uniq Switch 00:01010000 4. 3. Note: To finish the operation without clearing the unique switches. <4>. Press <Enter>. 1. <*>. press <Cancel>. Press < > or < > of the cursor key to move the cursor. From standby. Clear Unique Switch / /Enter 2. About the “ ” symbol at the list The “ ” at the list indicates that you can set the switch respectively for the second phone line. <0>.7. repeat step 3–5. See “3. or by pressing the numeric keypad. or < > or < >. The unique switches will reset to factory defaults. <4>. • Press <Reset> not to save the setting of the displayed unique switch. Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad.3. The primary back up battery maintains these settings if power is lost.1 Setting the Unique Switches These switches are used to program internal machine parameters.2 Clearing the Unique Switches Resets the unique switches to factory defaults. 1. Press <Enter> to save the setting of the displayed unique switch and return to the unique switch edit screen. 6. Clear Uniq Switch Yes → Enter 3. To navigate through the unique switch settings: • • • • The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right). From standby. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby.26 Multi Line Settings” on page 3-146 for the setting. 3-89 . < >. 00:00000000 01010000 5. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby. press <Menu>. Call up the desired switch by pressing < > or < >. Press <Enter>. Press <Enter>.7. to change the bit value. Otherwise. Set Uniq Switch / /Enter 2. proceed to step 7. press <Menu>. 4. 3.

> key.Unique Switch 00 — Dialer Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Congestion tone detection 0: No 1: Yes Ring back tone wait time (seconds) 3. Sets the time until the ring back tone begins after answering an incoming call in the Fax/Tel Ready or Tel/Fax Ready mode.3 3.0 3. switch 7 switch 6 /P 0 0 – 0 1 /T 1 0 /P 1 1 Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Enable the dial prefix key 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments Determine what character will be displayed first when pressing <Pause/Dial Opt.6 3. 5 0 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 Unique Switch 01 — Dialer Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 0 Adjust First displayed symbol when pressing <Pause/Dial Opt. /P : Dialling pause – : Hyphen /T : Cignal Change 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Unique Switch 02 ∼ 09 – Factory use only 3-90 .> key Chara.9 Switch 5: 0 0 1 1 Switch 4: 0 1 0 1 Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments Setting this switch to “0” ignores telephone line congestion tones.

However.2mm) 2 1 0 0 1 1 Factory use only The number of times PPR is detected during ECM transmission 1 time 2 times 3 times 4 times 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Unique Switch 11 ∼ 15 – Factory use only Unique Switch 16 – Transmission Switch 7 Initial Setting 1 Adjust Available *.33 recommendation. Transmit the sub–address and box name of F–code box with F–code polling document. 4 1 3 0 2 1 0 0 Retrieve the document received in F–code SecureMail box by polling transmission.Unique Switch 10 – Transmission Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 1 0 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Including TTI inside the document 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments Setting this bit to “0” transmit the document length added with the TTI. Do not send the sub–address and password of F– code box when a point of sending DCS signal after EOM signal. Setting it to “1” transmit the length including TTI inside the document. (TTI length: 4. # and space upon F–code box registration 0: No 1: Yes Available *. 0 1 Note: The “F–code communication” is possible the SecureMail and Polling operation using the F–code (SUB/SEP/PWD/SID). # (sharp) and space are available upon F–code box registration. it is not based on T. Determines if checking the space stored in the F–code ID. However in this case. the image at the top of the document might be overlapped with TTI. # (sharp) and space are available upon F–code communicating. 6 5 1 0 Determines if the * (asterisk). # and space upon F–code communicating 0: No 1: Yes Ignore space in F–code ID 0: Yes 1: No F–code sub–frame off 0: Send 1: Not send Send F–code box’s TTI 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Retrieve document 0: No 1: Yes Ignore F–code bit 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments Determines if the * (asterisk). 3-91 . Neglect SEP bit of DTC signal or SUB bit of DCS signal at F–code polled transmission.

2 1 0 0 1 0 Determines the action when disable to detect first NSF in real time transmission. Unique Switch 19 – Factory use only 3-92 . 3 0 Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line when the transmission speed fall down under 4800 bps. 0 0 Unique Switch 18 – Transmission Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Disconnect the line when the transmission speed falls down under 7200 bps 0: No 1: Yes Disconnect the line when the transmission speed falls down under 4800 bps 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Transmission when disable to detect first NSF in real time transmission.Unique Switch 17 — Transmission Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only JBIG transmission 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments Determines if the JBIG transmission is available. 0: Retry to detect NSF 1: Transmit with the standard protocol Usage/Comments Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line when the transmission speed fall down under 7200 bps.

(Fax/Tel Ready or Tel/Fax Ready mode only. 0 1 Unique Switch 21 – Reception Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 1 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only TCF check time (in 100 ms units) Usage/Comments If the TCF time is such that poor image quality is the result.Unique Switch 20 – Reception Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 1 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only No use Transmit CED signal 0: No 1: Yes Pseudo-ring start time (seconds) 5 6 8 10 Switch 3: 0 0 1 1 Switch 2: 0 1 0 1 Printout the pages completed to receive during receiving into memory 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments Determines if sending CED signal. lengthen the TCF check time. Switch 3 2 1 0 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Time 0 ms 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms 600 ms 700 ms 800 ms ← Initial setting 900 ms 1000 ms 1100 ms 1200 ms 1300 ms 1400 ms 1500 ms 2 0 1 0 0 0 3-93 . 3 1 Sets the time the pseudo–ring begins after answering an incoming call.) 2 1 0 1 Determines if whether to printout the page which data is completed to receive during receiving it into fax’s memory.

When the block junk fax feature is set to Mode 2 and the fax does not receive the TSI signal from the remote fax.Unique Switch 22 – Reception Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 1 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only JBIG reception 0: No 1: Yes Receive the junk fax 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments Determines how documents from the remote fax are received. determine if receiving the fax other than the remote fax number set to the block junk dial list. 2 0 1 0 0 0 Unique Switch 23 – Reception Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Receiving fax in 600 dpi (S– fine) 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments Sets whether to receive fax in 600 dpi. 1 0 0 0 Unique Switch 24 ∼ 29 – Factory use only 3-94 .

34 0: No 1: Yes 2800 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments If the error frame often occurs because of the symbol rate is too high. setting this switch to “1” mask that symbol rate and keep down the occurrence of error frame.34 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only 2400 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes 3000 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.Unique Switch 30 – Modem Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only 3429 baud symbol rate when communicating at V. 3-95 .34 0: No 1: Yes 3200 baud symbol rate when communicating at V. If the SNR is less than the threshold you set. 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 0 0 1 See above (switch 5 to 2). the modem overrides the bandwidth evaluation algorithm and forces the symbol rate to2400 baud. Unique Switch 31 – Modem Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 Adjust Forced 2400 symbol rate when probing SNR is adverse Usage/Comments SNR means that Signal Noise Ratio.

8 handshake is hard to achieve. Symbol rate adjustment.Unique Switch 32 – Modem Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only ANSam output time 0: 3 sec 1: 4 sec Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments The time limit to output the ANSam (A sinewave signal at 2100 Hz amplitude–modulated). Adjust the symbol rate selected by the link. set to “0”. Switch 6 5 4 FLAT 2Link 3Link 4Link 5Link 6Link 7Link 0 0 0 : 3429 3429 3200 3000 3000 3000 2800 0 0 1 : 3429 3200 3200 3000 3000 3000 2800 0 1 0 : 3429 3200 3000 3000 3000 3000 2800 0 1 1 : 3200 3200 3000 3000 3000 3000 2800 1 0 0 : 3200 3200 3000 3000 3000 3000 2800 No use No use No use No use 6 5 4 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 Unique Switch 35 ∼ 36 – Factory use only 3-96 . the re–transmission may become 1: No not to be occurred. 1 0 0 1 Unique Switch 33 – Factory use only Unique Switch 34 – Modem Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Usage/Comments Symbol rate adjustment When re–transmission occurs frequently. Sets to “1” when the V. 0: Yes When set to 1.

In this case. it may overlap the second post-message. increase the delay before the post-message is transmitted.Unique Switch 37 – Modem Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only The delay before postmessage is transmitted Usage/Comments If retraining occurs due to the low reception signal level and few delay of the telephone line. 0 ms 0 0 100 ms 0 1 200 ms 1 0 300 ms 1 1 3 0 Switch 4: Switch 3: 2 1 0 0 0 1 Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Unique Switch 38 ∼ 39 ––– Factory use only 3-97 .

set this switch to “1” and stop scanning by each page.Unique Switch 40 – Factory use only Unique Switch 41 – Scanner Switch 7 Initial Setting 1 Adjust Set the fixed ratio for copy and the auto ratio in detail 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments When set to “1”.g. 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Unique Switch 42 – Factory use only Unique Switch 43 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Stop scanning by each page 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments When feeding is slow (e. 1 0 0 0 Unique Switch 45 ∼ 47 – Factory use only 3-98 . the ratio will be calculated in detail automatically according to the document size and the recording paper size. the machine will set its background level at power-on. enlarge copy) and document jam occurs. 2 1 0 0 0 0 Unique Switch 44 Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Set background level when the machine turned on 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments When set to “1”.

Each setting changes by 1 mm.Unique Switch 48 – Scanner Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Leading edge document margin adjustment upon scanning using FBS Adjusts the leading edge margin when scanning document by FBS. Usage/Comments Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 000000 000001 000010 000011 000100 000101 000110 000111 001000 001001 001010 001011 001100 001101 001110 001111 010000 010001 010010 010011 010100 010101 010110 010111 011000 011001 : 111111 Settings 0 mm 1 mm 2 mm 3 mm 4 mm 5 mm 6 mm 7 mm 8 mm 9 mm 10 mm 11 mm 12 mm 13 mm 14 mm 15 mm 16 mm 17 mm 18 mm 19 mm 20 mm 21 mm 22 mm 23 mm 24 mm 25 mm 63 mm 3-99 .

Unique Switch 49 – Scanner Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Trailing edge document margin adjustment upon scanning using FBS Adjusts the trailing edge margin when scanning document by FBS. Usage/Comments Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 000000 000001 000010 000011 000100 000101 000110 000111 001000 001001 001010 001011 001100 001101 001110 001111 010000 010001 010010 010011 010100 010101 010110 010111 011000 011001 : : 111111 Settings 0 mm 1 mm 2 mm 3 mm 4 mm 5 mm 6 mm 7 mm 8 mm 9 mm 10 mm 11 mm 12 mm 13 mm 14 mm 15 mm 16 mm 17 mm 18 mm 19 mm 20 mm 21 mm 22 mm 23 mm 24 mm 25 mm 63 mm 3-100 . Each setting changes by 1 mm.

Unique Switch 50 – Printer Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 1 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Smoothing in H–Fine (400 x 400 dpi) mode 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing in S–Fine (200 x 400 dpi) mode 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing in Fine mode 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing in Normal mode 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments Smoothes the data scanned in each resolution mode. 2 1 1 0 0 1 Unique Switch 51 – Factory use only Unique Switch 52 – Printer Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Printing margin adjustment 0: Normal 1: No margin Usage/Comments 3-101 .

Unique Switch 53 — Printer Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Printer density adjustment. Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00001001 00001011 : Settings Not available Lightest : : Normal Initial setting : Darkest Not available ↓ Unique Switch 54 ∼ 59 – Factory use only 3-102 .

Note: To enable this function Unique Switch 60: 2 must also set to “1” Enables or disables silent detection during Ans/Fax Ready mode.Unique Switch 60 – Remote reception Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Use numeric keypad on the fax using second phone 0: No 1: Yes Manual transmit/receive using Start key after off–hook of second phone 0: No 1: Yes Silent detection 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments Determines if using the numeric keypad on the control panel of the fax using the second phone. 0 0 Unique Switch 61 ∼ 66 – Factory use only 3-103 . 1 1 Determines if transmitting or receiving manually using Start key after off–hook of the second phone.

Switch 3 2 1 0 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 ⏐ 1111 Number of detection Not detect 1 2 3 Initial setting 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 2 0 1 1 0 1 Unique Switch 68 and 69 – Factory use only 3-104 .Unique Switch 67 – Remote reception and TAD interface Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only No use CNG detection during OGM output in ANS Ready 0: Yes 1: No Number of detection DTMF Usage/Comments 3 0 Sets the number of detection the DTMF during Ans/Fax Ready mode.

the setting of 0: Remains in LCD this switch determines if the error message will 1: Returns to standby remain in the display.Unique Switch 70 – Operation Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 1 Adjust Usage/Comments Factory use only LCD error message After an error message has printed. 0 0 3-105 . Buzzer/keypad volume OFF Low Medium Maximum 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Unique Switch 71 – Operation Switch 7 Initial Setting 1 Adjust Line monitor in Quick memory transmission 0: Off 1: On Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Rx document to polling document 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 Retrieve the document received in the memory by polling transmission.

Unique Switch 72 – Operation
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Effect charge setting in department mode 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Transmit the consumables order sheet automatically 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments

When this bit is set to “1”, the following available: Input the price rate per page for transmission Print transmission charge on the department list

2 1

0 0

0

0

When both Unique Switch bit 8 and this bit set to “1”, the machine automatically transmit the consumables order sheet to the registered distributor’s office. It does not print the consumable order sheet. Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must register several items. See “3.17 Consumable order sheet’” page 3-138.

Unique Switch 73 – Operation
Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Print consumable order sheet 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments If this switch is set to “1”, the machine will print the consumable order sheet automatically when the drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the toner cartridge is near empty. Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must register several items. See “3.17 Consumable order sheet’” page 3-138. 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only

3-106

Unique Switch 74 – Operation
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Prohibit double registration 0: No 1: Yes Priority of consumable order sheet printing 0: Print after the current printing job completed 1: Print immediately Print the transmission time on TCR 0: Print the transmit time 1: Blank When receive a fax message during Auto power off mode, the LCD will be in standby mode 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments

2

1

1

0

When set to “0”, the same phone number can be registered in two or more one–touch keys or speed dial numbers. When the drum cartridge has reached its design life, or the toner cartridge is empty, the machine prints a consumable order sheet (see unique switch 73). When this switch is set at “0”, the machine not print consumable order sheet until the current printing job is finished. When set to “0”, the transmission time will be printed on TCR.

0

1

Unique Switch 75 ∼79 – Factory use only

3-107

Unique Switch 80 ∼ 84 – Factory use only Unique Switch 85 – Miscellaneous
Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Print/Send the consumable order sheet when the drum is near end 0: Yes 1: No Print/Send the consumable order sheet when toner is near empty 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only “Next doc” default setting when scanning with ADF 0: No 1: Yes “Next doc” default setting when scanning with FBS 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments When both bit 0 of Unique SW 72 and 7 of Unique SW 73 is set to “1”, the setting will be reflected to this switch. Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must register several items. See “3.17 Consumable order sheet” page 3-138. When both bit 0 of Unique SW 72 and 7 of Unique SW 73 is set to “1”, the setting will be reflected to this switch.Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must register several items. See “3.17 Consumable order sheet” page 3-138. Determine the default setting for “Next doc” scanning with ADF. If it is set to “0” the default setting for Next doc is “No”, if is “1” the setting is “Yes”. Determine the default setting for “Next doc” scanning with FBS. If it is set to “0” the default setting for Next doc is “No”, if is “1” the setting is “Yes”.

5

0

4 3

0 0

2

1

1 0

0 0

Unique Switch 86 – Factory use only Unique Switch 87 – Miscellaneous
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Print the sending document on the error message sheet 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments

1 0

0 0

Unique Switch 88 ∼ 95 – Factory use only

3-108

Unique Switch 96 – Miscellaneous
Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Multi line setting 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments This switch enables it to set the first and second line differently.

5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 1 0 0

Unique Switch 97 ∼ 99 – Factory use only

3-109

3.8 T.30 Monitor
In all binary coded facsimile control procedures the HDLC frame structure is utilized. The basic HDLC structure is shown below.
Preamble Binary coded infromation

Non-stabdard facilities frame(NSF) Called subscriber identification frame (CSI) Digital identification frame (DIS)

Flag

Flag

Address

Control

Facsimili contorl field

Facsimili information field

Frame checing sequence (FCS)

The information in this protion is printed in the T.30 monitor.

The control signal is identified by FCF (Facsimile Control Field). Additional 8–bit octet information follows FIF (Facsimile Information Field) and FC (Facsimile Control Field) to further clarify facsimile procedures. This is added to DIS, DCS, DTC, CIS, CIG, TSI, NSC, NSF, and NSS signals.

3.8.1 Print T.30 Monitor
This mode causes the unit to print a G3 procedural summary of the last fax communication. 1. From standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <5>. 2. The T.30 Monitor list will be printed.

3.8.2 Multi T.30 Monitor
The communications on the journal list are able to print. 1. Set the unique switch for Multi T.30 monitor to "1 (On)". (Unique switch 85 switch 0 ) 2. Print the journal list and check the communication number of which to print the T.30 Monitor. 3. From standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <5>. T30 Number

4. Enter the communication number and press <Enter>.

3-110

3.8.3 How to see the print out
(Example for fax transmission)

3-111

N=Normal) Receiver's minimum scan line time capability Recording width document size Compressing method Data signalling rate 3-112 . F=Fine.30 report RxFrame : Signals received from remote machine DATA: Additional 8–bit octet information to clarify facsimile procedures.(Example for fax reception) TxFrame : Signals sent by machine printing T. H= Hyper fine: 400 x 400 dpi. In the list. At the top of each data shows the type of the signal. page=EMC off) Mode (U=Ultra fine: 600 x 600 dpi. TCF : TCF check sequence PIX :Image data [V17 MMR A3 0 F E] Error Correction Mode (E=ECM on. the data are in hexadecimal digits.

The first three bytes of the FIF are specified by T. The following code table lists the codes used to make the 20–digit number and their value. printing starts from the least significant digit of the telephone number. The first byte refers to the country code. currently set at 00H The first byte indicates the country code Indicates the NSF code CSI. Below the code table is a CSI example. DCS frames define the standard CCITT capabilities of the two units such as transmit and receive speeds. TSI: CSI. printer speed. DCS: DIS. etc. The third byte is the manufacturer code. DTC. In the printed results. CIG. Code 30 31 32 33 Value 0 1 2 3 Code 34 35 36 37 Value 4 5 6 7 Code 38 39 20 Value 8 9 Space An example telephone number of 098–765–4321 is represented as: TxFrame RxFrame D A T A CIS 30 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 DIS. NSC. The second byte is a spare. it is 00 (hex) presently. coding methods. NSS: NSF. TxFrame RxFrame D A T A DIS 00 EF F9 C4 80 81 80 00 The bits are in the following order: ( 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1) (16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9) (24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17) (32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25) (40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33) (48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41) (56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49) (64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57) Table for hexadecimal digit to binary number: Hex Binary Hex Binary Hex 0 0000 4 0100 8 1 0001 5 0101 9 2 0010 6 0110 A 3 0011 7 0111 B Binary 1000 1001 1010 1011 Hex C D E F Binary 1100 1101 1110 1111 So in the above list the first "EF" is "11101111"(bit order 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1) 3-113 . TxFrame RxFrame D A T A NSF 20 00 00 45 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 The third byte is the manufactures code The second byte is spare. The subsequent digits are individually determined by the manufacturers. DTC.30. and subscriber’s telephone number. NSS are nonstandard unit frames. TSI is composed of a maximum 20– digit number comprising the country code.NSF. NSC. area code. CIG.

blocks and frames are displayed one value less than the real value. So in the above case: Pages: 00 means one page Blocks: 00 means one block Frames: 0F means 16 frames In PPR signal FIF. 3-114 . An example: TxFrame RxFrame D A T A PPS MPS BF 4F 00 00 0F PPR BC F0 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF PPR Pages Blocks Frames In PPS signal FIF. the error frame will be displayed with "1".A transmission with PPR signal: The error frame in fax reception is identified using the post–message signal and PPR signal. In the above case the fist frame is "F0" and it means there was an error from frame 4 to 7. the pages.

use this mode. Select “Set Replace Counter” and then press <Enter>. Set Replace Counter / /Enter 2. When you replace the Fuser unit or Transfer roller. Note: See “4. When “Please Call Service” message is displayed on the LCD To access the printer maintenance modes for determine the cause of the “Please Call Service” error message. Press <Menu>. press <Enter> and then skip to step 7. you must set the count of replacement manually To access the printer maintenance mode: 1. <*>. 5.3. <0>.” page 4-22 to 4-24 for the printer error messages and an explanation of each are outlined. • When you have replaced the Fuser unit and/or Transfer roller. • When “Please Call Service” message appear in the LCD. The LCD shows: Replace Fuser / /Enter 4. If you’ve replaced the transfer roller. If you’ve replaced the fuser unit. The LCD shows: Replace Transfer / /Enter 6. Press <Enter>. 3.15. press < > or < >. The machine goes back to standby mode.9 Printer maintenance mode In case of followings. <6>. access this mode to determine the cause of the “Please Call Service” error message. 3-115 .2 Please Call Service.

Current date.10. The telephone number registered in the Consumable Order Sheet. 3-116 .3.2 Contents of the service report The contents of the report Header: Line 1 Item Name Date Serial No Cut Tel (Customer’s telephone number) Installation Date Day Used / Work Day ROM Version Optional ROM 2 Detail The registered TTI or the “Customer’s name” registered in the Consumable Order Sheet. Service Report ** Printing ** The seven-sheet report will be printed and the machine returns to the standby mode. <0>. <7>.10. The date the machine was installed (The date set at User install) Days since the machine is installed / Days the machine has worked. The ROM version of optional devices. The Main ROM version. <*>. 3. 3.1 Printing the service report 1. Press <Menu>.10 Service Report Printing You can print out a report that contains machine’s usage and error history. (Detail report only) 3 4 5 The header is common for simple report and detail report. The serial number registered in the Consumable Order Sheet.

Fax). The number of times drum cartridge is replaced. The setting of consumable order sheet (Off. The drum cartridge rotating seconds. Printing Pages (Every I/C) The printed pages per device. Print. Life Counter: Items # of page printed after replacing toner # of pages printed after toner waning Toner Replaced Count Drum Rotation Time # of drum replacement Drum Life Time Custom Size (3 types) Order Sheet Setting Dealer Service Report Detail The number of printed pages that are printed using the present toner cartridge. The setting of service report (Off. The value in the parenthesis shows the pages printed with the current drum. Items Detail Present setting Whether the device is available or not. Printer Jam Info: The information of pages printed normally and jammed per paper supply devices. (I/C = Imaging Cartridge) JAM Pages (Every I/C) The jammed pages per device. 3-117 .The first page of the report Paper Cassette Status: Paper Supply Device: The device names that supply paper. if available the supplied paper size or “Paper out” is printed. Fax). The registered custom size paper. (I/C = Imaging Cartridge) Media The media supplied to the device. The value in the parenthesis shows the pages printed with the current drum. Paper Release Device: The device names that stack printouts. The number of times toner cartridge is replaced. The drum life time. The number of printed pages after “The toner is low” warning is displayed.

date and time of the following errors • Scanner jam • Printer jam • Service Call error 3-118 . System History: The latest 10 details.The second page of the report System Inside Information: Not used for field service.

The value in the parenthesis shows the page using the current drum. (I/C = Imaging Cartridge) Prt. OHP transparency. The value in the parenthesis shows the page using the current drum. Media and Paged Printed: Items Media Copy Printer Detail The media (plane paper. The number of pages used for copy. Items Detail Paper size The paper used for printing.The third page of the report Paper Size and Printed pages: Note: Some paper size may not be available on the machine. envelops / postcards) for copying and printing. TOTAL The total of all printed pages. paste board. (Every I/C) The number of pages used for PC printing. 3-119 . The value in the parenthesis shows the page using the current drum. Page Count The total pages counted according to the counter. (I/C = Imaging Cartridge) LST. The value in the parenthesis shows the pages using the current drum. (Every I/C) The number of pages used to print lists. Copy (Every I/C) The number of pages used for copy. (I/C = Imaging Cartridge) Sub Total The total of each item. The number of pages used for PC printing. (I/C = Imaging Cartridge) Fax (Every I/C) The number of pages used to print received fax.

Note: Some functions may not be available on the machine. Alternative magnification (enlarged or reduction) copy Combine Combine copy (n-in-1) Repeat Repeat copy Series Copy Series copy Shadow Clear Copy with boarder or center erased Margin Copy with binding margin attached XY Zoom Directional magnification copy Nega / Posi Copy with black and white area reversed Last job Copy the last job again Topup Copy TopUp Copy Duplex Duplex copy Booklet Booklet copy Mix Length Copy with mixed document size Fax & Copy Fax and Copy function 3-120 . Mag. Even magnification (100%) copy Alt.The fourth page of the report # of application copies: The number of times the copy functions are used. Items Detail Even Mag.

Note: Some functions may not be available on the machine. One-touch Program one-touch dial function Speed Tx Transmission using the Address Book Group Tx Transmission using the Address Group Macro Program Macro Program Stamp Transmission using the conformation stamp Energy Save Push The number of times <Energy Sage> key has pressed Review Key Push The number of times < Job Confirm. Items Detail Scan Rate The scanner used times 600 dpi The scanner used times in 600 dpi resolution 300 dpi The scanner used times in 300 dpi resolution 200 dpi The scanner used times in 200 dpi resolution 100 dpi The scanner used times in 100 dpi resolution Text The scanner used times in “Text” mode for document type Auto The scanner used times in “Auto” mode for document type Photo The scanner used times in “Photo” mode for document type 3-121 . Items Detail Prog. Items Detail # of Speed Dial The numbers of locations registered in the Address Book # of F–Code The registered F-code Boxes # of Key Macro The registered Macros # of Fax Fwrd. The registered Fax Forwarding conditions # of Batch Box The registered Batch Boxes # of Group Dial The registered Address Groups TWAIN Relative: The number of times the scanner function is used. Items Detail Scanner Pages The scanned pages Print Pages The printed pages # of Copies Copied pages Broadcast Tx # The numbers of locations in one broadcast transmission Rx File # The numbers of out-of-paper reception Reserved Command No The numbers of reserved transmissions Registered Number: The numbers registered in each function. / Fax Cancel > key has pressed Fax Forwarding Fax Forwarding function Delayed Tx Delayed transmission function F-Code Tx F-Code transmission function Fcode Polling F-Code polling function Max Number: The maximum numbers used in each function.Function Count: The number of times that advanced fax functions or other functions are used.

FBS or RADF. Photo and Auto. The numbers of documents scanned per text. per ADF. PageCount The total pages counted according to the counter setting. Photo and Auto. FBS or RADF. FBS or RADF. FBS or RADF. per ADF.The fifth page of the report Scan Pages / Rate: Note: The RADF is not available on the machine. type: Items Copy Fax Scanner Detail The numbers of documents copied per text. fax and scan function. Sub Total The total of copy. The numbers of documents transmitted per ADF. Total The total of all scanned documents. Scan Doc. 3-122 . Scanner The numbers of documents scanned in scanner mode and scanned times. Items Detail Copy The numbers of documents copied and copied times. per ADF. Fax The numbers of documents transmitted and transmitted times.

The total pages of transmission per G3. The total time of transmission per G3. ECM and Super G3. The total time of reception per G3. ECM and Super G3. The numbers of documents scanned per contrast. 3-123 . ECM and Super G3. # of Scanner Jam: The total number of document jam in each location Communication Info: Items Scanner Tx Times Memory Tx Rate Tx Times Rx Times Tx Pages Rx Pages Detail The number of times for non-memory transmission. ECM and Super G3. The total pages of reception per G3. The number of times for memory reception.Scan contrast: Items Copy Fax Scanner Detail The numbers of documents copied per contrast. The numbers of documents transmitted per contrast.

The sixth page of the report # of Errors: Number of errors in transmission per G3. ECM and Super G3. 3-124 .

3-125 . ECM and Super G3.The seventh page of the report # of Errors: Number of errors in reception per G3.

1. < >. perform step 1 by selecting “Off” using < > or < >. <0>. press <Menu>.12 Test Modes This mode offers the ability to print a test pattern and monitor certain unit output functions. <*>. Life Monitor / /Enter Test Pattern Print / /Enter Feeder Test / /Enter Port Status / /Enter Set Background Level / /Enter 2. Monitor Speaker :On / /Enter 2. 3. Press < > to scroll through the test modes. <0>.11 Monitor speaker If you need to monitor the signal of fax communication. Press <Enter> to entry the desired test mode. You can hear the signal sound with machine’s speaker during fax transaction.3. 3-126 . turn this mode to On. Press <Enter> to turn the mode on. Press <Menu>. From standby mode. 1. <9> to enter the test mode. Included are followings. <8>. <*>. Note: To turn this mode off.

No. <0>. the number of drums replaced and the total page count on the current drum.12. Note: The All RAM Clear setting does not clear the life monitor. <9>. ? 2. and transmitted. 3-127 . To clear. see below. <Enter>. <*>. Press <Menu> to exit the display life monitor. Press the number to select the desired display. printed. 1. Press <Menu>. The following options are available: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 00 = displays software version 01 to 02 = displays software version of the optional kit 11 = displays machine’s serial number 12 = displays installation date 13 = displays total pages scanned 14 = displays total pages printed 15 = displays total pages transmitted 16 = displays drum replaced 17 = displays total drum rotating time 18 = displays toner replaced count 19 = displays printed pages after toner near end has been displayed 20 = displays fuser replaced count 21 = displays fuser life 22 = displays transfer roller replaced count 23 = displays transfer roller life 3. the total number of pages scanned.3.1 Life Monitor The life monitor displays the current software version.

3. 3-128 . <9>. <0>. Select Test Pattern A:Checkered 2. Press < > or < > until the desired pattern is displayed.2 Printer Test The Printer Test mode offers seven different test patterns as shown below. Press <Menu>. then press <Enter>. <*>. Press <Enter>. A: Checkered B: Squares C: Paper Scum D: Halftone E: Halftone2 F: White G: Black H: Ladder I: LED Head Test J: H Pattern Note: DO NOT print the H Pattern. < >. 1. Select Test Pattern B:Squares 3. Printing H Pattern with documents in memory may delete them all.12. when there is a document in memory.

3 Feeder test The feeder test discharges all documents in the automatic document feeder at a constant speed and displays the document total in the LCD. <*>. therefore this mode should be used to reset the threshold when these items are changed. 2.4. <0>. < > twice.12. Press <Stop> to stop printing.12. 3. Press <Enter>. Paper Size :Auto / /Enter Paper Size :A4 / /Enter 5. then press <Enter>. 1. Press <Stop> to exit the test mode. <9>. Feeder Test / /Enter 3. 4. or the ballast is replaced. < > four times. Press <Start> to start the feeder test. Note: The background seal at the inside of the scanner cover should be cleaned prior to setting the background level to ensure an accurate reading. CCD. 3. Select the paper size to test. Press < > or < > until the desired size is displayed. The Set Background Level mode allows the level to be set without erasing memory contents. Pattern B ** Printing ** The selected pattern will be printed continuously. This threshold can change if the scanner lamp. <*>. 6. Press <Menu>. repeat the steps 1 to 6. 3.5 Set Background Level The background level is an established threshold used to help measure the reflective ability of a scanned document. Set Background Level 3-129 . then press <Enter>. To select another pattern. <0>. 1. 8.12. <9>. 7. Press <Menu>.4 Port Status This test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine. Load test documents into the automatic document feeder.

14 Factory Functions This factory functions provide several machine testes including LED and LCD tests. Memory Switch ** Printing ** 3.1 Function List Press <Menu>. <*>. memory tests. To select the desired test mode.14. 1. <*>. <1>. <1>. <0>. Press <Menu>. Factory Func List / /Enter 2. A list of the Factory Functions will be printed. 3-130 . <1>. <1>. Press <Stop> to exit the test mode. and optional RS–232C test port test. all red LEDs will turn on. Press <Menu>. 3. memory switch and unique switch settings. the unit returns to standby. <1>. • • • • • • • • • Prints a list of the Factory Functions LED test LCD test Key Panel test SRAM check DRAM check RTC test Page memory check Generate bell test 3. Pressing <Start> three times. After printing the unit will return to standby. After printing. <1>. Pressing <Start> twice.13 Print Machine Parameters. 2. <*>.14. < >. press number as indicated in the following list. LED Test Pressing <Start> once. Press <Menu>. The list shows the default and current settings for each.3. then press <Enter>. a RTC test.2 LED Test 1. all LEDs will turn on. Then press <Enter>. a keypad test. <1>. all green LEDs will turn on. <*>. Memory Switch and Unique Switch Settings This function instructs the unit to print a list of the machine parameter. 1.

Size Document/Resolution Contrast Menu Key ENTER CANCEL SORT or REPORT BYPASS or MONITOR COMBINE PAUSE DIAL OPTIONS ADVANCED FUNDTIONS SPEED DIAL/ GROUP JOB CONFIRM. 3-131 . < > three times. 3. RESOLUTION CONTRAST MENU Indication in LCD COPY/FAX Macro Program M1 throughM7 [01] through [40] Paper size/Next Doc Doc. a representative name as show in the following table will be displayed. <1>. <*>. Finally pressing <Start>. Then press <Enter>.14. < > twice.3. Key Panel Test 2. DOC. LCD Test Pressing <Start>. Press <Menu>. <*>. As each button on the keypad is pressed. all dots turn off. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST UVWXYZabcdefghijklmn 2. all dots turn on. 1. Press <Stop> twice to cancel the key panel test. <1>. the alphabetical characters are shown on the LCD. <1>. Press <Menu>. then press <Enter>.Confirm 0 through # Reset Start Stop 3.14.4 Key Panel Test 1. SIZE DOC. Key COPY/FAX/SCAN MACRO PROGRAM Macro keys M1 to M7 One-touch keys 01 through 40 PAPER SIZE/NEXT DOC. Numeric keys <0> through <#> RESET START STOP Indication in LCD Enter Cancel Soft Key 1 Soft Key 2 Soft Key 3 Advanced Functions Speed Dial/Group Job. Next pressing <Start>.3 LCD Test This mode displays two test patterns in LCD. Press <Stop> to exit the test mode. <1>.

Enter the HEX code (00 ~ FF) using numeric keypad and one–touch key [01] to [06]. <2>. 3. <*>.5 SRAM Check This mode is used to test the SRAM memory where user programmed parameters such as date. time. 1. the machine returns to the test mode. Then the machine will return to factory function. Press <Menu>. <*>. then read from. or document memory. 3. The data are written to. The All RAM clear erases all user settings and resets all memory switches. This is a read/write test that requires a few moments to complete. SRAM Check NG 700100:0000 3. etc are stored. If the read/write test is successful the display will show “OK”. Please refer to the following table: Note: Usually. Press 0 1 2 3 Check area All DRAMs The standard memory on the main control board The first half of the 32MB Optional Memory PCB The second half of the 32MB Optional Memory PCB 3-132 . Depending on the amount of DRAM in the unit. Press <Menu>. then read from. <1>. the unit will perform an All RAM Clear.14. The HEX code is written to. 1. The All RAM Clear erases all user settings and resets all memory switches. Note: When this test is executed. SRAM Check OK If some portion of the read/write test fails the display will show “NG” with the address and the data name. TTI. < > five times. Note: Perform a DRAM test whenever a memory upgrade is added to the unit. <1>. the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display. The results are shown in the display. SRAM Check Hex Code: 2. or <3> on the numeric keypad. Note: When this test is performed. <1>. Then press <Enter>. each address. <1>.6 DRAM Check This mode is used to test the DRAM memory. Upon completion. machine parameters and unique switches to factory defaults. machine parameters and unique switches to factory defaults. an All DRAM Clear will be performed by the unit. then press <Start>. < > four times. <1>. then press <Start>. DRAM Check Hex Code: 2. Then press <Enter>. Enter the HEX code (00 ~ FF) using numeric keypad and one-touch key 01 to 06.3. memory. After that. press <0>. press <0>.14.

The bell stars ringing. Generate Bell Test 2. <*>. <1>. Press <Menu>. perform this test. Press <Menu>. The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display. if the check area is “0” and one additional memory. 3. Press <Menu> to exit the test mode. perform the DRAM clear (page 3-132). Then press <Enter>. Press <Start>.7 RTC (real time clock) Test This test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine. Page Memory Check 2. For example. 3. <*>. <1>.14. <1>. < > eight times. Press <Stop> to exit the test mode.9 Generate bell test 1.4. 1. 3. you will see: DRAM Check OK:1 NG:2 When the memory is upgraded you will see: DRAM Check OK:123 NG: 5. If NG is shown. 3. < > seven times.14. and then go back to step 1. 3-133 .8 Page memory check When the letters are not printed correctly. The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display. <1>. 3. Press <Stop> to stop. Then press <Enter>.14.

Use < > or < > to toggle the various relays and switches on and off as outlined on the following table: CML_ON / /Enter CML relay – on CML relay – off S relay – on S relay – off DP relay – on DP relay – off H relay – on/ H relay –off L relay – on L relay –off CONT24V relay – on CONT24V relay – off RI relay – on RI relay – off Hook key 5. Press <Menu>. an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line jack.3. Select the line you want to test by pressing < > or < > and press <Enter>. <2>. and DTMF output monitoring. Press <Menu> again to return to standby mode. you can only test line1. 3. 6. Press <Menu> to exit the relay test mode. Select Relay by pressing < > or < > and press <Enter>. Press <Menu>. Select Tonal by pressing < > or < > and press <Enter>. <2>. 1. NONE / /Enter 3-134 . Select the line you want to test by pressing < > or < > and press <Enter>. 3. 1. If the optional second phone line is not attached. Tonal / /Enter 4. you can only test line1.15. If the optional second phone line is not attached. LINE1 / /Enter 2. Use < > or < > to select your desired tonal signal test. Included are relay tests. <*>. Relay / /Enter 4. LINE1 / /Enter 2. Note: To monitor the tones.15. <*>.1 Relay Test This mode tests the on/off operation of various relays and switches. <1>. 3. modem signal output monitoring. <1>. then press <Enter>.15 Line Tests This mode offers several internal tests and ability to monitor certain unit output functions. 3.2 Tonal Signal Test The tonal signal test permits the unit’s output tones to be monitored.

Signal None (stop signal) 400 Hz tone 600 Hz tone 1100 Hz tone 1300 Hz tone 2100 Hz tone 3000 Hz tone 3400 Hz tone FSK WHITE FSK BLACK FSK _W1_B1 V27_1200_2400 picture date V27_1600_4800 picture date V29_2400_7200 picture date V29_2400_9600 picture date V17_2400_7200_W1_B0 picture date V17_2400_7200_W1_B1 picture date Signal V17_2400_7200_W1_B4 picture date V17_2400_7200_W0_B1 picture date V17_2400_7200_W4_B1 picture date V17_2400_9600_W1_B0 picture date V17_2400_9600_W1_B1 picture date V17_2400_9600_W1_B4 picture date V17_2400_9600_W0_B1 picture date V17_2400_9600_W4_B1 picture date V17_2400_12000_W1_B0 picture date V17_2400_12000_W1_B1 picture date V17_2400_12000_W1_B4 picture date V17_2400_12000_W0_B1 picture date V17_2400_12000_W4_B1 picture date V17_2400_14400_W1_B0 picture date V17_2400_14400_W1_B1 picture date V17_2400_14400_W1_B4 picture date V17_2400_14400_W0_B1 picture date V17_2400_14400_W4_B1 picture date Signal V34_2400_2400 ~ 21600 V34_2800_4800 ~ 26400 V34_3000_4800 ~ 28800 V34_3200_4800 ~ 31200 V34_34290_4800 ~ 33600 VOICE MELODY GRBT 5. Press <Menu> again to return to standby mode. 3-135 . press <Menu>. Note: It may take several moments for output signal to change. To exit the tonal signal test mode.Refer to the table below. 6.

you can only test line1. Note: It may take several moments for output signal to change. 3. press <Menu>. 0 / /Enter Refer to the table below. To exit the DTMF output test.15. proceed to step 6. 7. To stop outputting the DTMF tone. an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line jack. 8 . To select another DTMF tone.3 DTMF Output Test The DTMF output test permits the unit’s DTMF tones to be monitored. <*>. Use < > or < > to select your desired tonal DTMF tone. <1>. press <Stop>. Select the line you want to test by pressing < > or < > and press <Enter>. Select Tonal by pressing < > or < > and press <Enter>. repeat steps 3–4. Press <Menu> again to return to standby mode. 3-136 . LINE1 / /Enter 2. 1. Otherwise. Note: To monitor the tones. then press <Enter>.3. <2>. Press <Menu>. 6. If the optional second phone line is not attached. DTMF / /Enter 4. Display 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AST SHARP Signal DTMF0 (941 Hz+ 1336 Hz) DTMF1 (697 Hz+ 1209 Hz) DTMF2 (697 Hz+ 1336 Hz) DTMF3 (697 Hz+ 1477 Hz) DTMF4 (770 Hz+ 1209 Hz) DTMF5 (770 Hz+ 1336 Hz) DTMF6 (770 Hz+ 1477 Hz) DTMF7 (852 Hz+ 1209 Hz) DTMF8 (852 Hz+ 1336 Hz) DTMF9 (852 Hz+ 1477 Hz) DTMF6* (941 Hz+ 1209 Hz) DTMF# (941 Hz+ 1477 Hz) Display ROW1 ROW2 ROW3 ROW4 COL1 COL2 COL3 COL4 Signal ROW1 (697 Hz) ROW2 (770 Hz) ROW3 (852 Hz) ROW4 (941 Hz) COL1 (1209 Hz) COL2 (1336 Hz) COL3 (1447 Hz) COL4 (1633 Hz) 5.

Then move the mirror carriage locking plate to “LOCK” and secure it with the screw. Important: If reshipping.3.16 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode Important: The machine is shipped with mirror carriage locking plate for protecting the machine’s mirror carriage during shipping. 3-137 . Press < > to change the setting is “OFF” and then press <Enter>. <*>. Then turn the power on and perform the following: 1. When installing the fax. Press <Menu>. slide the scanner locking knob back to its unlocking position. <4>. Mirror Lock :On / /Enter 2. turn on this mode to move the mirror carriage to the transport position. <1>.

3. ROM version 3-138 . User Install).17 Consumable order sheet When the drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the toner cartridge is near empty. Order item Description of the order item Quantity of the order item 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Dealer’s name Dealer’s code Dealer’s telephone number Dealer’s fax number Comments Drum rotate time (x 10 seconds) Drum life time Drum used percentage Total print pages Number of print pages after toner bottle or drum unit was replaced. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Dealer’s fax number Customer’s name Place of the customer write his/her signature Block letter of customer’s signature Customer’s address Customer’s account Serial number of the unit C ’ l h b Customer’s fax number registered by Initial setting mode (Setting. the machine prints (or transmit) the consumable sheet.

The customer’s account may be up to 10 characters in length.17. The LCD will show: CustAccount . Clear the junk data. The customer’s address may be up to 30 characters in length. Press <Enter> to save the distributor’s code and continue. Press <Enter> to save the customer’s account and continue. The consumable order sheet will be sent to this fax number when “Transmit” is selected in the “Order Sheet” setting in step 13. The LCD will show: Dealer Code . The fax number can be up to 10 characters in length. 6. Press <Enter>. The LCD will show: Address2 . 5. <*>. Press <Enter> to save the distributor’s phone number and continue. if necessary (see “Clear consumable order sheet. The LCD will show: Cust Name . The LCD will show: Address 1 . Press <Enter> to save the customer’s name and continue. Press <Enter> to save the distributor’s fax number and continue.Upper Enter the dealer’s code. The LCD will show: Dealer Tel No Enter the distributor’s phone number. 2. The fax number can be up to 20 characters in length. 11.Upper Enter the customer’s address for the Lower row. The LCD will show: Dealer Name .Upper Enter the customer’s name.1 Set consumable order sheet 1.” next page). Press <Enter> to save the customer’s address and continue.Upper Enter the dealer’s name. 8. 10. 4. The name may be up to 30 characters in length. The LCD will show: Dealer Fax No Enter the dealer’s fax number. 9. 7. <5>. The LCD will show: Cust Tel 3-139 . The customer’s address may be up to 30 characters in length.3. <1>. Press <Menu>. Press <Enter> to save the distributor’s name and continue. Set Order Sheet / /Enter 3. The customer’s name may be up to 30 characters in length. Press <Enter> to save the customer’s address.Upper Enter the customer’s account.Upper Enter the customer’s address for the upper row. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.

Press <Menu>. < >. <1>. ”Transmit”. Press <Enter> to save the fax machine’s serial number and continue. 3). To finish the operation without clearing. The LCD will show: Order Sheet:Off / /Enter Select “Off”. <5>.17. Press <Enter> to save the customer’s phone number and continue. print the consumable order sheet. 14. Press <Enter> to save the setting. Press <Enter> to print the consumable order sheet. To clear the information of consumable order sheet. 3-140 . 12. In case of “Transmit”. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length. 0. 1. these are not clear the all RAM clear function (MENU. 13. The number may be up to 18 characters in length. Reset Order Sheet Yes → Enter 3.Upper Enter the fax machine’s serial number. <*>. *. press <Cancel>. Reset Order Sheet / /Enter 2. Press <Menu>. <*>.Enter the customer’s phone number.Serial .3 Print consumable order sheet To check the customer’s information has been registered correctly. the “Supply Notification Report” will be printed for user’s confirmation. < > twice. when it is confirmed that the order sheet has been sent to the set destination normally. press <Enter>.2 Clear consumable order sheet The consumable order sheet keeps several items. Note: Press <Reset> to go back to the standby mode. 3. Print Order Sheet / /Enter 2. To clear the information of consumable order sheet: 1. <1>. or “Print”. Press <Enter>. 3. <5>. The LCD will show: Unit.17.

1. Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization.3. printed. <*>. 3. <7>. Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization. 1. press <Cancel>. This mode clears these counters. DRAM Clear Yes → Enter 2. and transmitted. <1>. along with the drum replacement count and total pages printed on the current drum. Press <Menu>. <*>. Press <Enter>. <1>. The counters will be reset. press <Cancel>.18 DRAM Clear Note: Perform a DRAM clear whenever a memory upgrade is installed to the unit or the DRAM is replaced. Clear Life Monitor Yes → Enter 2. 3-141 . <6>. The DRAM will be cleared. Press <Menu>.19 Clear Life Monitor The life monitor keeps a count of the pages scanned. Press <Enter>.

Note: To turn off the service code and return to normal life monitor clear (not protected). Set Service Code New Passcode :1234 4.20 Clear Optional Data This mode clears all data and all activity journals for Printer controller and second phone line. 3.3. Press <Enter>. <1>. Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit service code. <9>. Set Service Code Old Passcode :**** 2. Press <Enter>. press <Cancel>. abort this operation without entering the service code. • If modifying ––– Use the numeric keypad to enter the proper service code and press <Enter>. 1. <*>. the fax will reject the attempt and abort this operation. If it is not necessary to protect to the life monitor clear operation. <8>. <*>. Option Data Initial Yes → Enter 2.21 Set Service Code This is the code to protect the life monitor clear operation. Press <Menu>. 3. <1>. change the code to 0000 by repeating steps 1-4 and entering 0000 in step 3. Your next mode depends on whether you’re creating or modifying the service code: • If creating ––– Use the numeric keypad to enter 0000 and press <Enter>. 3-142 . Press <Menu>. If you enter an invalid code. The optional data will be cleared. 1. Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization.

2. Fuser Replaced Count 0000000000 10. then press <Enter>. After you write down the counter values of the life monitor. Then press 12 to 25. you should register the previous several counter values of the life monitor. Enter previous value of the toner life. Enter previous values of the printed pages. Enter previous value of the fuser replaced count. Toner Life 0000000000 9. Before updating the software or replacing the main control PCB. update the software or replace the main control PCB. then press <Enter>.) 3. To confirm the life monitor. press <Menu>. Enter previous value of the drum replaced count. Enter previous value of the transfer roller life. then press <Enter>. Enter previous value of the transfer roller replaced count. Drum Replaced Count 0000000000 6. then press <Enter>. then press <Enter>. press <Menu>.1 Life Monitor.3. write down the counter values of the life monitor. <0>. <*>. Then. <9>. Fuser Life 0000000000 11.12. Transfer Life 0000000000 13. Enter previous value of the fuser life. (See “3. 1. Transfer Rplcd Count 0000000000 12. then press <Enter>. The machine returns to its standby mode.22 Life monitor maintenance When you replace the main control PCB. 14. <Enter>. 4. Drum Life 0000000000 7. then press <Enter>. Enter previous value of the drum life. <2>. then press <Enter>. Enter previous value of the toner replaced count. Printed Pages 0000000000 5. 3-143 . <*>.” page 3-127. then press <Enter>. Toner Replaced Count 0000000000 8. <0>.

Note: CAS2. When the sensor operates. Press <Stop> to return to standby mode.23 Sensor input test This mode can confirm the sensor status. Press < > or < > to display the desired sensor. Name – – – – – Status DREX:1 DRNW:0 DVNW:0 0: No drum 1: Detect drum 0: Drum new – – – – – 1: Drum used 0: Developing unit new – – – – – 1: Developing unit used DS1 0: No document 1: Document existing DS2 0: No document 1: Document existing Home Sensor 0: Mirror outer than HS 1: Mirror inner than HS TXIL 0: Scanner cover is close 1: Scanner cover is open 0: Platen cover is closed – – – – – 1: Platen cover is open Show the internal – – – – – temperature of machine. when open the 1st paper cassette. 2. JAM2 and PES2 do not change. the value next to sensor name changes 0 to 1. 3-144 . <2>. For example. Show the voltage of the – – – – – SDRAM backup battery. when there is no second cassette attached. Show the remaining toner – – – – – level. <2>.3. CAS1:0 JAM1:0 PES1:1 CAS2:0 JAM2:0 PES2:0 DS1 :0 DS2 :0 HS TXIL:0 APS :0 Code CAS1 JAM1 PES1 CAS2 JAM2 PES2 HPES C2U CVSW PSS PDS SWB Sensor name OPEN1 JAMC1 PES OPEN2 JAMC2 PES2 TRAYS – – – – – – – – – – PSS PDS DPS :0 HPES:1 C2U :0 CVSW:1 PSS :0 PDS :0 SWB :1 TMP BAT THR TS1 TS2 000 000 000 000 000 Status 0:1st cassette is close 1:1st cassette is open 0: 1st side cover is close 1: 1st side cover is open 0: Detect paper is 1st cassette 1: No paper in 1st cassette 0:2nd cassette is close 1:2nd cassette is open 0: 2nd side cover is close 1: 2nd side cover is open 0: No paper in 2nd cassette 1: Detect paper is 2nd cassette 0:No paper in bypass tray 1:Detect paper in bypass tray 0: No 2nd cassette 1: 2nd cassette is attached 0: Front cover is close 1: Front cover is open 0: No paper 1: Detect paper 0: No paper 1: Detect paper jam Not working Code DREX DRNW DVNW DS1 DS2 HS TXIL APS TEMP BATT THRM TS1 TS2 3. the CAS1:0 change to CAS1:1. <*>. Press <Menu. 1. Show the remaining toner – – – – – level. Show the temperature of – – – – – Heater roller.

Select the device you want to set to ON using cursor key. Press <Enter> to toggle the ON and OFF. Press <Menu>.3 All clear the registered parameters of the network board You can clear all the data of network settings like IP address. <*>. Press <Enter>.25.1 Display the server sum-check 1.24 Printer diagnostic mode This mode can confirm the operation of each parts of the printer section. 2. Press <Menu>. Sumcheck : 3. 3. Fan Full :Turn the fan motor with full power Rx Motor :Turn the Rx motor Dup Motor :Turn the Duplex motor Clutch 1 :Turn the clutch of 1st cassette Clutch 2 :Turn the clutch of 2nd cassette Reg Clutch :Turn the Regist clutch ALL OFF :Turn the all device to off 4. 1.The machine displays the Sum check.3. press <Cancel>.2 Clear the Administrator’s information This mode is no available for this machine. 3. <2>. 1. <*>. < >. <3>. <2>.25. Press <Menu>. 3. Press <Reset> to exit. <*>. <2>. 2.25 Network service mode This mode is available only when the optional network board has been installed. Press <Enter>. <4>. Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization. Fan Full :OFF / /Enter :OFF / /Enter :OFF / /Enter Rx Motor :OFF / /Enter :OFF / /Enter Dup Motor :OFF / /Enter :OFF / /Enter Clutch 1 Clutch 2 Reg Clutch ALL OFF 2. This mode provides the following three items: • Display the sum-check of internet fax board • Clear the Administrator’s information (Not available for this machine) • All clear the registered parameters of the optional Internet fax board 3. <4>. Press <Enter>. Press <Reset> to return to standby mode. 3.The information will be cleared. Subnet Mask or Default Gateway.25. 3-145 . Clear Server Data Yes → Enter 3.

Press <Enter> and make the desired settings for the second phone line. Press <Enter> and make the desired settings for the second phone line. 9. Press <Enter> and make the desired settings for the second phone line.7 Unique Switch Adjustment” from page 3-89. Press <Menu>. if necessary. Press <Menu> twice and < >. Press <Enter> to save the setting. 3-146 . See “3. Press <Enter> and make the desired settings for the second phone line. Press <Enter> and make the desired settings for the second phone line.3 Memory Switch Adjustment” from page 3-60 if necessary. it is necessary that the Unique Switch 96 bit 6 is set to “On (1)” in advance. 11. Press <Menu> twice < > and then <Enter>. Dialing Pause / /Enter 8. You will see a “ ” mark on the list for switches available to set respectively for the second phone line. ECM Mode / /Enter 6. Press <Reset> to go back to the stand by mode. Press <Enter>. Press <Enter>. <*>. 12. 3. 5.26 Multi Line Settings This setting makes it possible to set the following menu for the optional second line: • Memory Switches • Unique Switches • ECM mode • Dialing Pause • Number of Rings Note: To set the second line. 1. <8>. <2>.and then <Enter> Set Memory Switch / /Enter 2.3. See “3. You will see a “ ” mark on the list for switches available to set respectively for the second phone line. 7. Set Uniq Switch / /Enter 4. # of Rings / /Enter 10.

<2>. 2.3.27 Flash Rom Sum Check This mode allows you to check Sum after the Flash ROM version is updated. 3-147 . 1. ROM :CD08 ROM1:5BE6 ROM2:FC62 3. Press <Reset> to return to standby mode. <*>. Press <Enter> The machine displays the Sum check. <9>. Press <Menu>.

• When you select “Interval”. Press <Enter>. Enter the settings for “Location 1” described through Steps 4 to 6.28 Set Service Report 3.3. The LCD shows: Period :Interval / /Enter Press < > or < > to select the sending period from “Interval” or “Monthly” and press <Enter>. The LCD shows: Report Format:Simple / /Enter Press < > or < > to select the Report format from “Simple” or “Detail” and press <Enter>. You can set the interval for service report auto transmission from 1 to 12 months. <4>. <*>. 4. To send the report on a designated time once a month. proceed to step 9–2. Enter the desired number (01 to 12) using the numeric keypad. • When you select “Monthly”. the LCD will show: Location1 :Off / /Enter Two fax numbers can be set as Service report sending destination (“Location 1” and “Location 2”). 3-148 . Enter Time (01–12) 03 months The default setting is 3 months. Then press <Enter>. Select “On”. and press <Enter>. Enter the fax number and press <Enter>. the machine will return to the display in step 1. Note: When you have selected “Off”. 8. select “Interval”. Press <Menu>. and then enter settings for “Location 2”. When you selected “On”. you should be enter following items: • Report location 1 and 2 – Where to send the service report • Report format – Select between simple report or detailed report • Period – The report can be send ether once in a determined month or one a month on a designated date and time. <2>. 7. proceed to step 9–1. Set RDS / /Enter 2. Location1 Fax Number US models have initially input fax number for “Location 1”. Press < > or < > to select “On” or “Off” and activate/deactivate service report setting. 9-1.28. then press <Enter>. 6. select “Monthly”. 1. To send the report at some definite interval. Send SvcReport :Off / /Enter 3. 5.1 Set the service report If using this feature.

<2>. press 0 5 1 4 0 0.10.00:00 For instance. To finish the operation without clearing. To clear the information of service report setting. Monthly 01. the print out of the report is available: 1. Enter the day and time in 24–hour format when to send the report. press <Enter>. <*>.2 Clear service report To clear the information of service report: 1. to send the report every 5th day of the month at 2 pm. < >. < >. Service Report / /Enter 2. <*>. <2>. 3.28.2 Contents of the service report on page 3-116 for detail. < >. <4>. Press <Menu>. Press <Enter>. Press <Enter>. According to the setting. Clear RDS Yes → Enter 3. 3-149 . The contents of the detail report See 3.28. Press <Reset> to go back to the stand by mode. either the simple report or the detail report will be printed. 10. press <Cancel>. 3. <4>.9-2.3 Printing the service report If set. Clear RDS / /Enter 2. Press <Menu>. and press <Enter>.

The contents of the simple report The simple report contains the following information of the detail report. ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ Header Paper Cassette Status: Printer Jam Info Scan Pages / Rate: # of Scanner Jam Communication Info 3.29 Printer registration adjustment This mode can adjust the print registration for each paper source. see “5.10. See 3.3 Adjustment” in section 5. For more detail.2 Contents of the service report on page 3-116 for detail. 3-150 .

:English / /Enter Enter the items following the LCD. • To clear the consumable order sheet setting. <0>. • To set the service report settings. 1-1. select “Clear Order Sheet” and press <Enter>. Initial settings 2. select “Set Order Sheet” and press <Enter>. • To print the consumable order sheet. • To clear the service report. To start Initial setting mode. Service Report settings Note: Before starting the installation settings. <9>. See “Initial setup” in the User’s Guide for detailed instructions. select “Set RDS” and press <Enter>. See page 3-149 how to enter the items. 3-151 . <Enter>. <*>. <9>. See page 3-140 how to enter the items. 1-3. 2-1. <*>. The LCD shows: Language 1-2. press <Enter>. press <Menu>. • To return to the standby mode.3. Consumable order sheet settings 3. See page 3140 how to enter the items. press <Reset>. Set Order Sheet Reset Order Sheet Print Order Sheet Set RDS Clear RDS / /Enter • To set the consumable order sheet. See page 3-148 how to enter the items. you should set some parameters according to the following procedures. select “Print Order Sheet” and press <Enter>. After you have entered all the initial setup items. clear the memory by pressing <Menu>. <2>. select “Clear RDS” and press <Enter>. See page 3-139 how to enter the items. The LCD now shows the Consumable order sheet setting menu and Service report setting menu. 1. You can do the following setting with continuously.30 Quick Initial settings At installation of this machine. Use < > or < > and display the desired menu.

enter an administrator password or provide confirmation. Note: For Windows Vista Users: 1. click [Run Setup. The following applications are available for the update application: · Windows 98 · Windows 2000 · Windows XP · Windows Vista The screen image may differ according to the Windows version of the PC.exe].1 Install the update application on PC To update the software. Click [Install]. Insert the supplied CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the "AutoPlay" dialog box appears. 3.31. Install the update application on your PC 2. first install the USB RomWrite application on your PC. 2. 1.3. Update the software using the PC The installation is only necessary for the fist time. 3-152 . 3. Install the USB driver on your PC 3. Click [Next]. you should follow the following steps: 1. 2. When the "user Account Control" dialog box appears.31 Update the software To update the software using your PC.

Click [Next].) 1350 USA A0A0A0 1350 EUR A0A0A0 2. <*>. When the installation is completed. When the operation system is Windows 98/2000/XP. <9>. 3.4. click [Finish]. Plug the USB cable with the machine and the PC. <Enter>. <8>. (The displayed LCD may differ according to the model and software version.2 Installing the USB driver on the PC Install the USB driver to connect the machine and the PC 1. the driver software will be installed automatically. Press <Menu>. 3. it detects a new hardware and the following wizard opens. 3-153 . When the operation system is Windows Vista. The installation is over here.31.

Select [Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)] and click [Browse]. Select the folder where the USB driver for RomWrite is installed. Note: The driver is placed on the PC when you have installed the application on the PC. 3-154 .4. and click [OK]. 5.

3-155 . Click [Finish] when the following screen appears.6. Confirm the driver location and click [Next]. 7.

Connect your PC and the machine with USB cable. <8>. Launch the RomWrite application registered in the Startup menu. scanning or printing ends.) 1350 USA A0A0A0 1350 EUR A0A0A0 2. Click [Start] on the PC screen. or the stored data is transmitted. 3. 3-156 . Press <Menu>. <9>.3 Updating the software using the PC Important: You cannot update the software in following situations: · The machine is in transmission · The machine is in scanning or in printing · Data are stored in memory In that case. deleted or whatever and update the software. <Enter>. wait until the transmission.3. (The displayed LCD may differ according to the software version. 1.31. <*>.

Click [Start].4. 5. then writes the new program to the machine. 3-157 . Click [Browse] and designate the ROM data file. The ROM Writer erases the current program in the fax machine.

04: Sector erase error E.The update stars. <*>. 8.? 0:1350 USA A1A0A0 No. 7. When the ROM update is completed.02: Maker code read error E. <0>.? 0:1350 EUR A1A0A0 Note: The number differs according to the software version. confirm the cable connection. Disconnect your PC from the machine. <0> to confirm that the machine has the latest software.05: Writing error E.06: Sum check error E. 3-158 . <Enter>. the following error code will be appeared: E. the following check– sum table appears. the machine reboots. The machine goes to the Start up screen and the ROM update program starts.07: Time out error When the above error occurred. When the job is completed. <9>. No. turn off the power switch. 6. Error code If the error occurred during writing. <0>. and then perform from step 1 again. Press <Menu>.

htm 3.10/dialoption. the following dialing characters will be converted to certain characters specified here: ・ Pause (/P) ・ Tone (/T) ・ Flash (/F) 1. see table below. When transmitting on e-mail gateway. Up to two characters are able to enter for each dialing character. Enter the characters to which the machine should convert the dialing character.3. Note: “Tone” is for USA model only.htm” (slash dialoption dot htm).1. Type the machine’s IP address in the URL address field followed by “/dialoption. For available characters. Start the web browser on a network computer. For example. If the box is blank.32 Convert dialing characters in e–mail gateway functions Note: This function is available only when the optional network board has been installed. the dialing characters will be override when transmitting over the e–mail gateway. 3-159 . 4. Click “Save” to save the setting. 2.168. http://192.

steam generators. Away from water heaters. • Verify that the recording paper has not been damaged in any way.6°F (10°C to 32°C) at 20% to 80% humidity with no condensation. The unit should be located in a well ventilated area. Away from dusty areas. Away from areas where chemical fumes or gasses are generated or may collect.Section4 Troubleshooting Procedures 4. • Verify that the recording paper has been stored away from moisture and damp areas. • The unit should not be connected to an electrical circuit with other equipment or where voltages • • • • • • • • • may vary. Check the following: • The power source should be rated according to unit specifications. The unit should receive necessary cleaning and maintenance. level surface. Away from areas exposed to direct sunlight. The unit should be installed on a flat. Check the consumable: • Verify that the recording paper supply is adequate and that it conforms to the type specified for use in the machine. humidifiers or other areas of high humidity.1 Troubleshooting Outline Before troubleshooting a unit check the following: • • • • Is the power cord correctly connected to the machine? Are the telephone handset and the telephone line cord connected correctly? Is there paper in the paper cassette? Are all covers closed correctly? Before removing any portions of the machine or making any adjustments be sure the power cord is disconnected from the unit. The ambient temperature and relative humidity surrounding the unit should be 50°F to 89. The unit should be installed: Away from heat sources and heating or cooling vents. 4-1 .

and the pick-up roller. Verify the fuser rollers are clean and not damaged. Verify that the document feeds into the unit and stops. Verify the scanner cover is closed properly. 8. 8. Check all connectors and cables. Suggested corrective action: 1. Suggested corrective action: 1. If not. Verify that the recording paper conforms to the type specified for use in the machine. Remove any foreign substances from inside the scanner area. check the operation of the paper feed solenoid PFCL.2 Recording Paper Jam Symptom: Recording paper did not exit paper cassette properly or jam occurred in print area. Check for obstructions in the paper path. on the Connect A PCB. Symptom: Recording paper jammed as it was exiting the unit into receive paper tray. 11. If worn or damaged. (Clean using a lint-free cotton cloth moistened with a cleaning designed for use on rubber rollers. 7. 4. 3. If the main motor is turning. Clean using a lint-free cotton cloth moistened with a cleaning solution designed for use on rubber rollers. 5. Clean the paper feed rollers of any paper dust buildup. Verify that the paper has reached sensor PSS. replace the main motor. Check for obstruction in the paper path. Check the operation of the main control board. If it has. pins 6-8. 2. document feeder error message. Replace the rollers if worn or damaged. Suggested corrective action: 1. Verify the operation to the ADF Motor at connector P82. replace the fuser. 4. Check the operation of DS1 at connector P82. Clean the exit roller using a lint-free cloth moistened with a cleaning solution designed for use on rubber rollers. Check the operation of the separator roller. check the operation of PSS. and that has not been damaged or exposed to moisture. Verify the original documents conform to the specifications designed for use in the machine and that they are not damaged in any way. 7. the power supply unit or the main control PCB. Verify the number of documents placed into the feeder does not exceed its maximum capacity.3 Document Feeder Jam Symptom: Original document did not feed into or exit scanner properly. If the document does not stop.4. 4. on the Connect A PCB. Replace the exit roller if worn or damaged. 4. on the Connect A PCB. Check the paper guide in the cassette is adjusted properly to the paper and operation is done. 5. 10. Verify that all of the document feed rollers are clean and not damaged. 6. 3. pins 9-12. check the operation of DS2 at connector P82. Check the paper discharge sensor (PDS) for proper operation. If the main motor does not turn. Verify the paper pick up roller is turning. 9. 2. 3. Make sure the recording paper is properly loaded into the bypass tray and cassette and the cassette is properly closed. 4-2 .) Replace the paper feed rollers if worn or damaged. 2. check the main motor. pins 3-5. 6.

Clean using a lint-free cotton cloth moistened with a cleaning solution designed for on rubber rollers. 3. Suggested corrective action: 1. Verify that the timing belt doesn’t out of joint.) 4. journal. <1>. 3. 2. Check for wire or other foreign object obstructing the light path to the CCD. Clean mirror A. Suggested corrective action: 1. If the black line in not on the memory print outs. 5. Verify the pages of the document are not stuck together from glue. Check the operation of HOME sensor at connector P2. separator roller and separator pad are clean and not damaged. (See page 2-2.7 Transmit Black Lines Symptom: A black line appears on all documents transmitted or copied. 2. 4. Print a document from memory (mode list. Then press <Menu>. <4> to turn off the mirror carriage carry mode. <*>. on the CCD PCB. Verify that the original documents conform to the specifications designed for use in the machine and they are not damaged in any way. 4. etc. Verify the feed roller.5 Mirror Carriage Error (MFX-1350) Symptom: The mirror carriage doesn’t move. pin 1-3. B and C.4 Document Feeder Multi-feeding or Skew Symptom: Two or more pages of a multi-page document are fed at once. 3.) to determine if the problem is in the scanner. 4. Release the scanner unit locking switch if it is not released. Slight skewing may sometimes occur. etc. tape. Verify that the scanner unit locking switch has been released. Suggested corrective action: 1. Replace these items if worn or damaged. Suggested corrective action: 1. wet or damp correction fluid. Reference the error code on the check message or the journal to the error code list contained in this section. Check for a foreign object in the feeder. the problem is in the scanner. 2. (See page 5-81) 4-3 . Clean the ADF glass. The document is fed on the skew.6 Transmit Error Symptom: Check message prints after attempting transmission.4.

3. Verify the telephone line is properly installed. Insure Security TX turned off. check the NCU PCB. 5.10 Will not Auto-Answer Symptom: The unit rights but will not auto-answer. the transmitting unit may “time out”.1 Place a call to the remote machine and verify that if auto answers. 5. 6. 4. Check the power cord and AC switch. Suggested corrective action: 1. 6. Verify the telephone line cord is properly installed and plugged into the correct type of wall jack.8 Cannot transmit Symptom: The unit will not transmit Suggested corrective action: 1. Verify that the remote location is capable of receiving by checking the following: 6. 6. 6. 7. If it is set to a high number of rings. 4-4 . Check the operation of the NCU PCB and the main control PCB.3 Transmit to another location. If no dial tone is present at the unit. 4. 4. 2.4. Verify that the correct telephone number has been dialed or that the correct telephone number is programmed in the autodialer. Place a call through the monitor and check for excessive noise or interference on the telephone line. 2. 4. 7. Check the memory capacity. 3.2 Insure that the remote machine does not have closed network or block junk fax turned on. Check the operation of NCU PCB and the main control PCB. Suggested corrective action: 1. Reference the error code on the check message or the journal to the error code list contained in this section. Check for dial tone at the unit and wall jack.9 Receive Errors Symptom: Check message prints after attempting a reception. Verify recording paper in the paper cassette. Check the number of rings is set to answer on. Insure the unit is in the Fax Ready mode. The unit will not answer incoming calls if memory is full.

press <Cancel>. To continue scanning from the jammed page forward (keeping in mind the Note at the end of step 1.11 Clearing Jammed Paper If the original document jams 1. e. Important: If you wait more than 60 seconds without pressing any key. This will erase from memory all pages stored during this operation. Error on scan at page xx” message will be printed out if the document jammed during transmission. Note: If the document jammed in the following case. If you wish to cancel this operation. • The first page of the document jammed • During the real time transmission or quick memory transmission • During non-sorting ADF job Open&Close ScanCover Reset Document Also. press <Enter> and proceed to step 2. which page number) is jammed. If an original document jams in the ADF while scanning the document into the memory for faxing or copying. the following message will appear and the machine will abort the operation anyway. 2.Reset Document Press Start Key Note: If you wait more than 60 seconds without pressing any key. instead. The machine will delete all pages from memory and then return to its standby mode. The LCD will show which page (i. the machine will begin to send or copy the document(s) it has.4. and the machine will return to standby mode. the LCD will show: Document Jam ContStor Enter/Cancl If you do wish to continue the operation. 4-5 . press <Stop>. To abort the operation. the “Repeat transmission.. you’ll have to perform the job again from scratch. the machine will erase all pages from memory stored during this operation and the machine will return to the standby mode. above). press <Start> after clearing the jam. P 2.

use the Document glass to resend it. 2. 3. Close the ADF cover. making sure both sides are snapped down securely. Pull the document gently and out of the ADF. turn the release knob to remove the jammed document. 4-6 . The document glass is available only for the MFX-1350. Open the ADF cover. Note: If the original document has become wrinkled or torn.To remove the document: Jammed in input area 1. Note: If you cannot remove.

use the Document glass to resend it. The document glass is available only for the MFX-1350. If you cannot it. The document glass is available only for the MFX-1350. use the Document glass to resend it. Open the platen cover. 2. Gently pull the jammed document. Close the platen cover and the ADF cover. 2. 4-7 .Jammed in feed area 1. Open the platen cover. Close the platen cover and the ADF cover. Jammed in exit area 1. open the ADF cover and turn the release knob to remove the jammed document. Open the ADF cover and turn the release knob to remove the jammed document. Note: If the original document has become wrinkled or torn. Note: If the original document has become wrinkled or torn.

Removing jammed paper To clear a printout jammed inside your machine: 1. If the optional second cassette is attached. Note: Avoid getting unfixed toner on your hands and clothes when removing jammed paper. Important: Do not touch the drum cartridge surface. 2. Carefully remove the jammed paper in the direction shown. If paper jams occur the LCD will show: Open 1st Side Cover Please remove Paper Follow these procedures to clear the paper jam. CAUTION: When you open the side cover to remove the paper. DO NOT touch the fuser roller. Jammed in feed area 4-8 . Pull the release lever to open the side cover. If a paper jam occurs during fax reception. Scratches or smudges will result in poor print quality. the machine will store the received document in the memory and printout them automatically when you have cleared the paper jam. also open the 2nd side cover.If a printout jams inside your machine 1.

4. Carefully remove the jammed paper. 4-9 .Jammed in fuser area Jammed in paper exit area If the jammed paper was fed a little and you cannot seize it easily: 3. lift the front part of the cassette slightly up to release the cassette from the machine. After you pull it out completely. Open the paper cassette.

then insert it completely. Open the front cover and then close it to clear the message on the LCD. Lower the rear part of the cassette to align the rear edge to the slot of the machine. 2. 4-10 . Removing jammed paper from the bypass tray 1. If the paper is not properly fed into the machine through the bypass tray.5. Close the side cover and insert the paper cassette. the LCD will show: Remove Bypass Paper Open&CloseFrontCover Pull the flapper release lever and pull the paper out of the machine.

8. level surface. Should not be exposed to high temperatures. The unit: 1. be sure power to the unit is OFF.12. Improper charging • Replace the High Voltage Unit. Should not be connected to an electrical circuit with other equipment or where voltages may vary. Improper LED exposure • Replace the LED Print Head Unit. Poor development • The drum cartridge or toner cartridge may be not installed correctly. Improper charging • Replace the High Voltage Unit. 3.4. 7.1 Blank pages Symptom: Page is solid white. 4. • Replace the Main Control PCB. Should have the power cord correctly connected. Install each cartridge correctly. • Replace the Toner cartridge. check the following. If printer or print quality problems occur. Should not be exposed to direct sunlight 9. steam or chemical fumes. Should not be exposed to high dust concentration. The Image Quality Problems The following provides guidelines for troubleshooting the printer engine and actions to be taken. Improper LED exposure • Replace the LED Print Head Unit. Most conditions can be corrected by performing routine preventative maintenance steps.12. Should not be installed near a direct heating or cooling source or vent.2 Black pages Symptom: Page is solid black. Should receive good ventilation. Should be installed on a flat. Should be connected to a power source which is rated to machine specifications. 2. 4. 4-11 . • Replace the Main Control PCB. high humidity.12. 6. 5. Suggested corrective actions should be performed in order as listed. Before removing any portions of the machine or making any internal adjustments. 4. • Replace the Main Control PCB. • Replace the Main Control PCB.

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Poor development • • • • Replace the High Voltage Unit.4 Printout too dark Symptom: Printed image is faint or does not print solid. • Clean the LED print head. • Replace the High Voltage Unit.4. ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Poor development • The drum cartridge or toner cartridge may be not installed correctly. • Replace the Main Control PCB. • Replace the High Voltage Unit.12. Poor image transfer • Replace the Image Transfer Unit. Replace the Toner Cartridge. • Replace the Toner cartridge. Replace the Drum Cartridge. 4. Replace the Main Control PCB.3 Printout too light Symptom: Printed image is faint or does not print solid. • Replace the Toner cartridge • Replace the High Voltage Unit.12. • Replace the High Voltage Unit. Defective Drum • Replace the Drum Cartridge. Defective Drum • Replace the Drum Cartridge. • Clean the LED print head. Install each cartridge correctly. Poor development • The drum cartridge or toner cartridge may be not installed correctly. Install each cartridge correctly.12. Poor image transfer • Replace the Image Transfer Unit.5 Blurred background Symptom: Copies show a gray or dark background. 4. • Replace the Main Control PCB. 4-12 .

• Clean the LED print head. A B CDE A B CDE A B CDE A B CDE A B CDE Poor development • The drum cartridge or toner cartridge may be not installed correctly. Install each cartridge correctly.7 Irregularities Symptom: Portions of image are broken or missing. 4-13 . • Replace the High Voltage Unit. Poor image transfer • Replace the Image Transfer Unit.12. • Replace the Main Control PCB. leave drum in unit with power on to dry. • Replace the High Voltage Unit. 4.6 Uneven print density Symptom: Image graduates from dark to light across page. • Replace the Drum Cartridge. ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Poor image transfer • Replace the Image Transfer Unit. • Replace the High Voltage Unit.4. Defective Drum • If the drum surface for moisture condensation found. • Replace the Toner cartridge.12.

8 White (Black) Line Symptom: White or black strip appears vertically through image. If it is not effective. 4-14 . 4. • Replace the Drum Cartridge.9 Toner Smudges Symptom: Background appears “peppered” with black spots.12. Improper LED exposure • Replace the LED Print Head Unit. replace Rollers or the Fusing Unit. Poor scanning • Clean the ADF glass. Improper cleaning • Replace the Drum Cartridge. Improper fusing • Clean the Fusing Rollers. ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Poor development • Replace the Toner Cartridge. Defective Drum • Replace the Drum Cartridge.12.4. ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Poor scanning • Clean the ADF glass. Improper charging • Clean the Charge Wire. Improper fusing • Replace the Fusing Unit. Poor image transfer • Replace the Image Transfer Unit.

If the optional NIC (network interface card) is attached to your machine. You tried to enter the same fax (or phone) number which is already entered in your fax machine. but your drum will need to be replaced soon. Set correct sized paper or change the paper size setting. then try again. Determine the correct call group identifier number and enter it.) You tried to change your fax machine to the copy mode. preventing such use. etc. Enter the correct TCP/IP address. You tried to erase a batch box which contains at least one document. Your machine can print about 500 more sheets. Close it properly. Replace it. Make repeated copies to help evaporate any internal moisture. You tried to enter a call group number greater than 32. Erase the document(s). The difference sized paper which is not same sized paper you told your sized paper you told your machine is loaded. Your machine can maintain 32 call groups. press stop to clear the error message and then re-try the transmission. LCD error messages (Alphabetic list) What you see on the LCD All Commands In Use What it means/What to do Your fax machine has all of its 99 possible delayed commands (automatic redialing counts as one) stored in memory and cannot accept another. (000-255) 4-15 . numbered 1-32 (call group 0 covers all the groups). You tried to enter a document into an F-Code box. (0-32) Enter No. An original document jammed while you are using the ADF for either faxing or copying. Delete documents stored in F-Code boxes until the machine will let you proceed. If you were transmitting. Turn off copy protection. The paper cassette indicated on the LCD is open or has not been closed securely. instead. Enter a different fax (or phone) number. A communication error disrupted the reception or transmission. You tried to erase a F-Code box which contains at least one document. Erase the document(s). The scanner lamp is dim or inoperable. try to contact the other person and have him/her re-try the transmission. Wait until your fax has completed one of the delayed commands or delete an existing command by using <Job Confirm. and you tried to enter a TCP/IP address greater than 255.4. Already Stored Box In Use Call For Service Check Paper Size Open&Close Top Cover Close XXX Cover Close 1st Cassette Close 2nd Cassette Communication Error Copy Off Document Full Document Jam ContStor Enter/Cancl Document Stored Drum Near End Enter No. Close it properly. but the unit’s copy protection feature is on.>.13 LCD Error Messages Your fax machine’s LCD messages can help you spot problems. (The problem may be entirely with his/her machine. phone line. If you were receiving a fax. The cover indicated on the LCD is open or has not been closed securely. then try again. but the machine has reached its capacity.

Press <Doc. but your fax machine had none stored. When you using the FBS (Flatbed scanner) glass. Try re-entering your F-Code box I. or . You tried to store a document into the F-code box which is set to be a relay box or security box.D. code. Size> to choose the size. . Turn off the transport mode. You tried to turn on the department code setting but there are no department codes stored in your fax machine. Press <Start> to tell your fax to keep as many pages in memory as possible. the machine received data more than it can fit in memory. .D. you tried to enter more pages into memory than your fax could store. The protection passcode you entered isn’t valid. Enter correct department code. which is already in use. Memory has overflowed during the fax reception. The transport mode is not turned off. Store at least one department code. The command you’re trying to enter requires the use of the ADF.> to review upcoming commands. Wait for the fax to complete the polling operation. Hang it up. You tried to change the function for a Soft key. Wait for the machine to stop using the ADF. During transmission (or copying). then try again. You cannot change the Soft key function until erase the Macro key that contains the Soft key you want to change. In PC printing. Press stop to return the standby mode. You entered incorrect department code at fax sending while the department feature is on. The mirror carriage of your machine has become inoperable. or the calculated reduction or enlargement ratio is out of the acceptable range (50 – 200 %) when the copy reduction or enlargement ratio is set to “Auto”. code you entered isn’t valid. then try again. but that Soft key has been programmed in a Macro key. The optional handset is off-hook. . entering the correct protection passcode. . You pressed <Job Confirm. A5 or F4 sized paper using the bypass tray. Erase the Macro key. Select the F-code box which is set to be a bulletin box. 4-16 . Repeat the operation. Macro In Use Memory Overflow Start Or Cancel Memory Overflow Memory Overflow Rx Mirror Carriage Error Mirror Locked No Command Stored No Department Code No Document Stored You tried to print a document from memory. The F-Code box I. You tried to erase a document which someone is polling from your machine. or change the paper for copying. but your fax machine had none stored. you must manually enter the scan size of your document. then try again. .What you see on the LCD Enter Reduce/Enlarge What it means/What to do You tried to copy your document on the paper other than A4. Enter Scan Size Feeder In Use Hang Up Phone In Relay Box or In Secure Box Invalid Number Invalid Passcode Line Busy You pressed a key which has no function during the current operation. or press <Cancel> to delete from memory all pages stored during this operation (but not previous operations). then try again. making sure the upper part of the handset presses down on the “hook” button. Enter the reduction or enlargement ratio manually although a part of the image might be lacked.

The command you’re trying to enter requires the use of the printer. Please wait until the fax is finished printing and then re-try your command or operation. then try again. Your machine can print about 100 sheets after this message appears. The paper is jammed in your fax machine. Reset the page and try again. then try again. Then set the correct size of paper and try printing again. Wait for the fax to finish printing. you pressed the key which cannot be registered in Macro. or the fax to which you’re sending can’t handle the document’s page length. Please properly install the toner cartridge. or to call using numeric keypad without PIN. The charge wire of drum cartridge is dirty. then retry again. No Number Stored No Passcode No PIN Number No Report No Toner Cartridge Not Allowed in Macro Open 1st Side Cover Please Remove Paper Open 2nd Side Cover Please Remove Paper Open&Close ScanCover Reset Document Open Front Cover Follow Instruction A Paper Mismatch Set XXX paper Press Stop Please Call Service XXX Please Supply Paper Please Replace Drum Please Replace Toner Please Wait Printer In Use 4-17 . Supply paper to the cassette and/or the bypass tray. Your fax machine’s printer is either warming up or busy. but afterwards the machine displays “Printer Not Usable” message and cannot print any page until the charge wire is cleaned. Press <Stop> to cancel a print job. You selected an autodialer. Open the cover indicated on the LCD. The machine cannot print until it is replaced with a new toner cartridge.What you see on the LCD No Drum Unit What it means/What to do The drum cartridge is missing or has not been properly installed in your fax machine. but there’s no protection passcode stored in your fax machine. batch box or F-Code box number for which there is no fax (or phone) number programmed. Either choose another number or dial a phone number directly from the numeric keypad. Replace the toner cartridge. In PC printing. Enter a PIN. The toner cartridge is missing or has not been properly installed in your fax machine. Please properly install the drum cartridge. such as <Monitor>. Replace it Your drum cartridge is empty. See page 4-22. which is already in use. Your toner cartridge doesn’t work. Your machine cannot print until it is replaced with a new drum cartridge. You selected “Mode1” in the pin mask feature and tried to call an autodialer number in which no PIN has been entered. The paper cassette or bypass tray is out of paper. Store a protection passcode in your machine. but your fax machine has no record of any fax jobs having occurred. the size of paper in the paper cassette is not match up the paper size you specified by printer driver. You tried to program a security feature. and remove the jammed paper carefully. Clean the charge wire. During macro registration. Either your document wasn’t inserted correctly. The printer unit of your fax machine has become inoperable. You requested an activity journal or confirmation report.

Press <Cancel> to delete the extra characters. Please set your document on the FBS glass to make the enlargement copy. About 100 more sheets can be printed. Print the received document from your fax’s memory. A5 or F4. Press <Cancel> to delete the extra numbers and then try again. first set the security reception setting to on. •The bypass tray has the paper other than A4. You tried to enter too many numbers for a broadcast. Stored What it means/What to do A received document was in your fax’s memory when you tried to turn off the security reception passcode. You can enter up to 60 steps into a macro key. Press <Paper Size> to select your desired paper. You may wish to review the operation’s appropriate instructions. To turn on or off the security reception using a Soft key. then try again. You attempted to enter too many numbers or other characters in the current operation. You tried to enter a sub-address identical to one already being used in another F-Code box. Wait for the fax to complete the scan. •Paper cassette(s) runs out of paper. Scanner In Use SecurityRx is Off Select Paper Size Sub-Address In Use Toner Low Too Many Characters Too Many Locations Too Many Steps Use FBS Glass 4-18 . You tried to enter too many steps for a macro. then re-try the desired command. Enter a different sub-address.What you see on the LCD Protect Doc. then retry the desired operation. You tried to turn the security reception on using a Soft key which is assigned to set the security reception to on or off. You tried to make a copy in the following conditions: •Paper size selection is set to “Auto”. The command you’re trying to enter requires the use of the scanner. You can enter up to 200 autodialer numbers and up to 30 numbers entered through the numeric keypad. Your machine cannot enlargement copy from the ADF. but security reception setting has not set to on. Your machine is almost out of toner. You tried to enlargement copy using the ADF. which is already in use.

The remote unit didn’t respond.1.0. Line noise or other problems prevented ECM reception.4.2 R.2. a check message will be printed. The receiving fax machine has reached its memory capacity. Increase the data error rate on Memory Switch C:0. the call couldn’t be completed or stop was pressed during dialing.4 R. Someone pressed <Stop> during fax reception. R. Adjust the data error rate on Memory Switch C:0.3 R. the call somehow didn’t go through or <Stop> was pressed during dialing. D. Poor line conditions made communication impossible.1. Your machine sends and receives only ITU-T Group 3 fax communication.2 4-19 . Poor phone line conditions made fax communication impossible.4 R. The machine received too large length data that over your machine’s limit.5.3.0.1 R.3. Poor phone line conditions prevented fax communication. The carrier was interrupted. D.3 T1 time-out. The calling unit was not a fax machine or the transmitting unit is having difficulties.8 D. Try the call again.7 The remote unit is busy.0.5. Either the line disconnected before reception was completed or too many errors were detected by the receiving unit. Try the call again.1. Retry the call. The two fax machines were incompatible.1 R.3. DCN was received from the transmitter.1 R.1 R. MPS/EOM/EOP was not received.4.2 R.0.0.6.4 R. Either the remote unit didn’t respond. DCN was received after FTT. Adjust the echo wait time on Memory Switch 21. DCN was received instead of RR during ECM communication.4.14 Error Codes If an error occurs during a communication. Enable the Eye Quality Check on Memory Switch 31 and 32. Result codes indicate the specific problem encountered: • • • “D” codes occur while dialing “R” codes occur during reception “T” codes occur during transmission Here is a list of error codes the fax machine may print. Communication was not possible at 2400 bps. Try increasing the output levels via Machine Parameter 00 switch 1. • • • • • • A possible solution to the problem The date and time of the attempted communication The sending location (if the remote fax has a Location ID) The number of pages which got through before the error terminated the call The error code The sample document You will also see a code listed in the Result column of the report. Too many errors were detected during data reception.2 D.4. Dialing errors D.3. the industry standard since the early 1980s. Enable the one second pause after CED on Memory Switch 20. No response to CFR. If your machine repeats the message. Reception errors R. call the remote fax unit’s operator and verify that unit is operating properly. The following provides an explanation of the information found on check messages. It may also be necessary to decrease the receive communication speed via Memory Switch C:0. Also try increasing the echo wait time on Memory Switch 21 if echo is on the line.

1 T.2. No response to CTC. PIP was received.10 T. Increase the ECM response time on Memory Switch 01 switch 2. Conditions can change rapidly. Also adjust the interval between DCS and TCF on Memory Switch01 switch 1. The fax machine timed out while waiting for the retrain signal. The transmission was interrupted by the call mode.4.1 T. The page counter in the fax machine detected a document feeder error during transmission. Attempt the solutions described for the T. Poor phone lines caused the receiving unit to disconnect.R. The remote fax machine didn’t complete the equalizer training phase. EOR was received from the remote unit but further transmission was not possible.11 4-20 . Poor line conditions prevented transmission.3 T.2 T. Line noise or other problems prevented ECM transmission. Try the call again.1 T. Line noise or other problems prevented ECM transmission.1 R.8.4 T.1. The receive machine may also have closed network or block junk fax enabled.8.5. Try increasing the output levels on Machine Parameter 00 switch 1. No response to RR from the remote machine.2. poor line conditions developed.1 T1 time-out. It may also be necessary to adjust the transmit speed on Memory Switch 01 switch0. Bad phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Either the phone line disconnected during fax communication or transmission became impossible due to bad phone line conditions. Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.3. Try the call again.5.3 T.2.4. Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.4. CFR or FTT was not received from the remote machine.1 error. Try the call again. T.1 T. so try the call later.1. It may be necessary to increase the output levels on Machine Parameter 00:switch 1. Transmission errors T. Call someone at the remote machine. This usually occurs during a manual transmission or when an incorrect number was dialed.5.2 T.8. RTN was received from the remote machine.8. The remote fax machine didn’t respond to your machine. Increase the ECM response time on Memory Switch 01 switch2. No response to MPS/EOP/EOM.1 T. If the problem persists. A compatibility error occurred. The two fax machines were incompatible.10 R. Carefully re-insert the document into the feeder and re-try the call. try increasing the output levels on Machine Parameter 00 switch 1. Adjust the interval between CFR and data on Memory Switch 01 switch1. After transmission began. No mailbox at receiver or security transmission is enabled. Someone pressed <Stop> during fax transmission.2 T.8.8. Adjust Memory Switch 01 switch5 for this problem. FTT was received from the remote machine at 2400 bps.4 T. The receiving unit may be experiencing problems.4.11 A compatibility error occurred. Turn on the echo protect tone on Memory Switch 01 switch 0.

Dialing number is not set.Communication Error Messages The error messages on Check Message printouts indicate the following: Here’s a brief summary: Error Message Check condition of remote fax. 4-21 . Stopped. Possible Meanings • Remote machine malfunctioned • No handshake signals from remote machine • Wrong phone number reached • Poor phone line conditions prevented communication • No handshake signals from remote machine • Document missfeed or miscount • Unable to reach remote machine after attempting specified number of redial tries • Remote machine’s line was busy • Remote machine didn’t answer • Receive confirmation signal not received from remote machine • Poor line conditions caused a poor image • Remote unit’s memory capacity has been exceeded • Stored phone number failed to dial properly • Someone pressed the <Stop> key at the remote fax during the handshake Repeat transmission. Memory full. Check received documents. Line is busy.

Press < > or < > to show the other printer error. <*>. If during step 1 the lamp is not on. 4. When this message appears. Press < > or < > until “Service Call” appears in the LCD and then press <Enter>. 5. 4-22 . 4. To access the printer maintenance modes: 1. (See “Mirror carriage error”. access the printer maintenance mode / Service call function to determine the cause of the “Please Call Service” error message. The kind of printer error will be displayed.2 Please Call Service The errors messages and an explanation of each are outlined below. Suggested corrective action: 1. check the following connection: • Lamp assembly to the Inverter PCB (CN2) • Inverter PCB (CN1) to the Harness to the CCD PCB (P4) 4. 1: RX Motor Error 2: Fan Error 3: Fuser Error 4: Drum Error 5: Developer Error When certain machine problems occur a “Please Call Service” message will appear in the LCD.15. 2. Open the platen cover and verify the lamp is on. <0>. Press <Stop> to exit this mode. The mode is contained within two main menu level.4.15. Set Replace Counter / /Enter Service Call / /Enter 2. 3. Verify the mirror carriage moves normally.1 Call For Service Symptom: “Call For Service” is in the LCD. page 4-3) 3. <6>. Replace the lamp and/or the Inverter PCB.15 Service Call Error When certain machine problems occur these message will appear in the LCD. Press <Menu>. Service Call Heater Error 4.

verify the fuser warms up when the power is on. Replace the main control PCB. Replace the main control PCB. and verify the fuser warms up. see step 4. 4. Verify the drum cartridge is set correctly. see step 6. If it does not. Check the point of contacts between drum cartridge and Connect A PCB (P86). 3. Fan Error Suggested corrective action: 1. 4. 5. 2. 6. (See page 2-1. Replace the Connect A PCB. Verify the RX motor rotates when the power is on. 2. Check the contact between Connect A PCB (P80C) and the main board. RX Motor Error Suggested corrective action: 1. Replace the main control board. 5. If it does not. Drum Error Suggested corrective action: 1. Turn on the power again. Verify the inside fan rotates when the power is on. 4. Replace the drum cartridge. replace the main control board. 2. Connect A PCB (P80C) and the main board. Check the connection between RX motor and the Connect A PCB (P90). 4. 5. Replace the Connect A PCB. Check the connection between the fan and Connect A PCB (P87).The errors messages and an explanation of each are outlined below. Check the contact between Connect A PCB (P80C) and the main board. Check the contact between Fusing thermistor and Connect A PCB (P89). Fuser Error Suggested corrective action: 1. If OK. Replace the Fuser. 5. Replace the Connect A PCB. 3. 3. 6. After replacing the Fuser. Replace the RX motor if it doesn’t rotate. 3. If the problem is not correct. 4-23 . Check the power is supplied to the Rx motor. 6.) 2. Replace the fan motor if it doesn’t rotate. see step 5.

2. Verify the toner cartridge is set correctly. Replace the Connect A PCB. 4-24 . Check the point of contacts between toner cartridge and Connect A PCB (P86). 6. 3.Developer Error Suggested corrective action: 1. Replace the main control PCB. Replace the toner cartridge. 5. Check the contact between Connect A PCB (P80C) and the main board. 4.

14. Verify that the electrical outlet is on. 7. 11. 10. If any of the following voltages are incorrect. • • • • • Pin 4. 3. 5 : +5 V • Pin 8. 15 Pin 12. Check the DC output voltages from the power supply unit to connector P3 on the main control PCB. 3. 13 Pin 12. 13 : +5 V : +3.4. 5 Pin 8. Verify that the power cord is correctly connected and the power switch is ON. If any of the following voltages are incorrect. replace the power supply. Suggested corrective action: 1. Verify that the power cord is correctly connected and the power switch is ON. replace the power supply.16 LCD Failure Symptom: No display in the LCD. 14. 11. Check for a blown fuse or open circuit on the unit’s internal power supply. Check the DC output voltages from the power supply unit to connector P3 on the main control PCB. Replace the associated PCBs and connector harness. 10. Check the following connectors: • LCD assembly to the Panel PCB (P52) • Panel PCB (P50) to the Harness to the main control PCB (P5) 5. 2. 4.3 V : GND : +24 V@Pin 1:5 V : +17 V@Pin 1:0 V 4-25 . Check for a blown fuse or open circuit on the unit’s internal power supply.17 General Power Failure Symptom: Unit will not power up. 2. 7. 15 : GND 4. • Pin 4. 9 Pin 6. 9 : +3. Suggested corrective action: 1. 4.3 V • Pin 6.

Rotate the rollers by hand to allow cleaning of the entire roller surface. Get two soft. lint-free cloths and moisten them as follows: • One with a cleaner suitable for use on platen/rubber rollers. we’ll call this the rollers cleaner. In steps 4 and 6. • The other with isopropyl alcohol 3.4. 4-26 . Use the cloth with the rollers cleaner to clean the face of the rollers. Never spray cleaner directly onto the fax machine as the spray could damage components inside the fax. It won’t stay open by itself. Note: You must hold the cover open. 2.18 Cleaning the Unit Use a mild cleaning solution on a lint-free cloth to wipe the machine’s cover. Curing frequent jams in the ADF If you’re having trouble with getting your original documents to feed properly. try this procedure: 1. Open the ADF cover. 4. Turn off your fax machine. handset and paper cassette tray.

Otherwise. Close the front cover. Document pad ADF glass ADF glass Document glass MFX-1350 F-305 Cleaning the drum chare wire and LED print head If there are streaks on your print. Using the cloth. 2. 2. ADF glass and the Document pad on the underside of the platen cover.Cleaning the Document glass. 3. Open the front cover. Get a soft. Gently pull the cleaning rod to and fro fully to the end several times. Important: Make sure the cloth doesn’t have any rough areas. lint-free cloth and moisten it with isopropyl alcohol. the drum charge wire and LED print head may require cleaning. gently clean the Document glass. 4-27 . it could scratch the glass surface of the FBS. 3. ADF glass and Document pad 1. 1. Open the platen cover.. Note: F-305 has no Document glass.

..............................................................2..........................................................................................................2 PCBS ......2 Re/Disassemble .....3 Adjustment........................................5-2 5.........................................5-82 5-1 ..6 Cleaning the Mirror A..............5-72 5.................................................3.................2...........................Section5 Maintenance & Adjustment 5.............................5 Separation Pressure adjustment ........................2 Printer registration mode ...3........................................................................7 Applying the Sheet Document Press (MFX-1350 only) ........5-69 5.............................5-69 5...........................4 PRINTER SECTION..................3..........................................................................................5-80 5.................5-76 5.1 Maintenance schedule ......5-81 5.........................2..........5-5 5......5-3 5................3..........................................................3 Zoom adjustment ...........................................................................................3........................................................................................................................................................3.3 SCANNING SECTION........5-69 5............... B and C.....................................5-15 5...................5-42 5..........2........4 Registration.........................................................................3....................................................1 COVERS..............................1 Outline of printer registration adjustment ................................5-24 5.......................

000 ✓ 60.000 or ✓ 2 years — 100.000 or ✓ 2 years QTY 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reference Page 5-47 5-48 5-51 5-52 5-53 5-54 5-54 5-61 Maintenance Cycle (pages) Clean Replace 60. 5-2 .5.000 100.000 or ✓ 2 years Clean when — dirty Clean when — dirty — 10.000 ✓ 100.500 15.000 16. Printer Section Parts Name Roller Transfer Roller Register Roller Pickup MP Printer Fuser Roller Exit Roller Pickup CST PAD Pressure CST Roller Feed Duplex Developing Section Parts Name MFX-1350 Drum cartridge (US) MFX-1350 Drum cartridge (Europe) F-305 Drum cartridge (US) F-305 Drum cartridge (Europe) MFX-1350 Toner cartridge (US) MFX-1350 Toner cartridge (Europe) F-305 Toner cartridge (US) F-305 Toner cartridge (Europe) Drum charge wire and LED print head Maintenance Cycle (pages) Clean Replace — 20. The maintenance cycle (pages or years) are not insured and early replacement of the parts may be needed to maintain the machine quality. However.000 ✓ QTY 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Reference Page 5-24 5-36 — 5-82 5-19 5-25 5-27 Note: “✓” means to clean the mechanism when a paper take-up or transport failure or print quality problems occurs. and the documents and paper that are used.000 20. *2 It is not a maintenance parts. please replace when it becomes not works.000 — — — — — ✓ 20. Note: The maintenance cycle (pages or years) may be shorter than the above value according to the environment or usage of the machine.000 30.000 7.000 hours 100.1 Maintenance schedule Scanning Section Parts Name Roller Separator*1 Pad Separator*1 Contact glass & Pane*2 Sheet document press (White sheet) *2 Exposure Lamp*2 Roller Feed Roller Exit *1 Replace the parts at the same time.000 5.000 ✓ 60.000 — QTY 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 See Operating Instructions Reference Page Maintenance Cycle (pages) Clean Replace — 60.000 100.000 or — 2 years 60.000 or ✓ 2 years 60.000 or — 2 years 60.

.......................................................5-21 PCB CONNECT A / POWER-SUPPLY ..............................................5-10 COVER TX SIDE F (F-305)............5-32 ADF MOTOR..............................................................................5-29 HOME SENSOR (HS) (MFX-1350 only).............................................................................2...............................................................................5-19 LAMP (F-305)................................1 COVERS.................................2 Re/Disassemble Before disassembling................................................................................................................................................5-5 TRAY DOCUMENT ........................................................................................................................................2 PCBS ......................................................2................................5-6 COVER CONNECT....................................................................5-15 PCB PANEL 1................................................................................................................................5-35 PAD SEPARATOR ....................................................................................................................................... disconnect the power cord and line cord.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5-24 ROLLER FEED ...............................................................................................................5-37 5-3 ......................................................................5-35 GUIDE OUTER .....................................................................................................5-25 ROLLER EXIT................................................................................................................5-17 PCB INVERTER (F-305)................5-28 FRAME SCANNER (F-305) ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................5-23 5..................5-9 COVER TX SIDE F (MFX-1350) ............................................................5-21 PCB PSU / PCB NCU ............................5-11 COVER FRONT ....................2...............................................................5-24 ROLLER SEPARATOR.....5-27 FRAME SCANNER (MFX-1350)...................................5-13 TRAY A MP/PAD FLAPPER MP...............................................................5-31 CHASSIS FBS .....................5-22 PCB CONNECT C .......5-13 COVER PANEL (F-305) ....................................................................................................................................................................................................5-20 PCB CONNECT B................5-7 COVER TX SIDE B (MFX-1350) ...................................................................................................................................... 5.............................................................................................................................................................................................................5-18 LAMP (MFX-1350) .....................................................................................................................5-12 COVER PANEL (MFX-1350) ...................5-8 COVER TX SIDE B (F-305) ..............3 SCANNING SECTION...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5-19 PCB MAIN......5-5 TRAY DOCUMENT ..................................................................................................................................................5-34 GUIDE INNER A ....5-33 Sensor TXIL ................................5-6 COVER PLATEN (MFX-1350 only) ...........................5-12 TRAY EXIT PAPER ...................................5-36 ADF DRIVE GEARS .................................................................................................5...................5-14 5...........................................................................................................................................................................................5-7 COVER ADF BASE (F-305 only) ........................................................5-16 PCB INVERTER (MFX-1350) ......

.................................................................................5-51 PRINTER FUSER .....5-49 SENSOR JAMC1 .....................................................5-55 SENSOR PES2..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5-59 SOLENOID (2nd CST) .................................................................5-41 5..4 PRINTER SECTION............................................................................................................................................5-50 SENSOR PSS................................................................5-56 ROLLER FEED 2ND (2nd CST) .....................................5-57 PLATE FRAME B GEARS (2nd CST).................................................................................5-58 SPRING CLUTCH (2nd CST) ......5-61 TONER SENSOR 1................................................................................................................................................................................5-40 ASSEMBLING THE FBS MOTOR (MFX-1350 only) ..................................................................................................................................................5-60 ROLLER FEED DUPLEX A ............................5-59 SENSOR OPEN2......5-42 CLUTCH (MG) .............................. 2 (TS1.................................................5-38 SENSOR DS1/DS2 ..............ADF PERMIT SENSOR (APS) .......5-44 FRAME DRIVE GEARS ..................................................2...............................................5-39 FBS MOTOR (MFX-1350 only) ...............5-42 SOLENOID......................................................5-54 PAD PRESSURE (1st CST) / (2nd CST) ...............................................................................................................................5-68 5-4 ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................5-53 ROLLER PICK UP (1st CST) / (2nd CST) ........................................5-43 SPRING CLUTCH.....5-45 ROLLER TRANSFER....................................................................................... TS2) .......................5-50 COVER SWITCH ...............5-51 ROLLER PICKUP MP / PAD PRESSURE MP.............................5-55 SENSOR JAMC2 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5-67 LED ................................................................................................................................................................................................5-66 SENSOR OPEN1........................................5-42 RX MOTOR ..........................................................................................5-63 SENSOR PES1.............................................................................................................5-56 PLATE FRAME B (2nd CST) .................................................................................................................5-52 ROLLER EXIT.....................................................................................................................................5-48 SENSOR TRAYS .........................................................................................................................................................................................................5-43 MOTOR DUPLEX.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................5-47 ROLLER REGISTER ............................................................................................................5-54 PIECE COVER CST (1st CST Paper dust)..............................

5.2.1 COVERS Cover Platen (page 5-7) Cover top (page 5-13) Cover contact (page 5-17) Cover panel (page 5-13) Cover ADF base (page 5-7) Cover LENS (page 5-19) Cover TOP PPF Cover option (page 5-20) Cover left (page 5-22) Tray exit paper (page 5-12) Cover front (page 5-12) (page 5-13) Cover TX side F (page 5-10) Tray document (page 5-6) Guide outer Cover TX side B (page 5-8) Cover jam access Cover connect (page 5-6) Tray A MP (page 5-14) Cover shield (page 5-20) Cover back (page 5-32) 5-5 .

Remove the Cover connect mounting screw. be careful not to get the harness caught on the Cover shield. 2. Remove the TRAY DOCUMENT. 3. Note: When reattaching the Cover connect. Disconnect the connector on the PCB CONNECT A. Tray document COVER CONNECT 1. 2.TRAY DOCUMENT 1. Remove the COVER CONNECT. Release the locking tab from the Cover platen. PCB CONNECT A Cover CONNECT 5-6 .

Release the locking tab.COVER PLATEN (MFX-1350 only) 1. Remove the Ground wire. (See page 5-6) 2. Remove the Ground wire. Remove the Cover connect. and then raise the Cover platen. 3. Remove the COVER ADF BASE. Cover platen Tab Ground wire Platen hinge COVER ADF BASE (F-305 only) 1. and then remove two Hinge mounting screws. Remove the Cover connect. 4. Open the Cover ADF base. and then remove the COVER PLATEN. Open the Cover platen. 3. Cover ADF base Ground wire Hinge 5-7 . 4. (See page 5-6) 2.

and then remove the COVER TX SIDE B. Remove the Cover TX side B mounting screw.COVER TX SIDE B (MFX-1350) 1. 3. 4. 2. Open the Cover platen. Cover TX side B Guide outer 5-8 . Release two locking tabs. Close the Cover platen. 5. Open the Guide outer.

Open the Cover ADF base. 2. 4. Close the Cover ADF base. Remove the Cover TX side B mounting screw. Open the Guide outer. 3. 5. and then remove the COVER TX SIDE B. Release two locking tabs. Cover TX side B Guide outer 5-9 .COVER TX SIDE B (F-305) 1.

Open the Cover platen. 2. 3.COVER TX SIDE F (MFX-1350) 1. Release the locking tab. Open the Guide outer. 5. 4. Close the Cover platen. Guide outer Cover Tx side F 5-10 . and then remove the COVER TX SIDE F. Remove the Cover TX side F mounting screw.

Close the Cover ADF base.COVER TX SIDE F (F-305) 1. 5. and then remove the COVER TX SIDE F. 2. 4. 3. Open the Cover ADF base. Remove the Cover TX side F mounting screw. Open the Guide outer. Release the locking tab. Cover Tx side F Guide outer Tab 5-11 .

and then remove the COVER FRONT. 4. Tray exit paper Cover front 5-12 . Release two locking tabs. Remove the Chassis FBS. 2. (See page 5-32) 2. Cover front TRAY EXIT PAPER 1. Remove three Tray exit paper mounting screws. Remove the Cover front. Open the Cover front. Remove the Cover left. and then remove the TRAY EXIT PAPER. 3.COVER FRONT 1.

then release three locking tabs. Remove five Cover top PPF mounting screws. Remove three Cover panel mounting screws. and then remove the COVER PANEL. Remove the Cover platen. 3. Remove five Cover top mounting screws. and then remove the COVER PANEL.COVER PANEL (MFX-1350) 1. Cover top PPF Cover panel 5-13 . Cover top Cover panel COVER PANEL (F-305) 1. and then removes the Cover top. and then remove the Cover top PPF. 3. then release three locking tabs. (See page 5-7) 2. Remove the Cover ADF base. (See page 5-7) 2. Remove three Cover panel mounting screws.

Pad flapper MP 5-14 .TRAY A MP/PAD FLAPPER MP 1. 2. Peel off the PAD FLAPPER MP. and then remove the TRAY A MP. Tray A MP 3. Open the Tray A MP. Release two locking tabs.

5.2 PCBS PCB PANEL 1(See page 5-16) PCB CCD (See page 5-28) PCB INVERTER (See page 5-17) PCB NCL (See page 5-22) PCB CONNECT C(See page 5-23) PCB PSU (See page 5-22) PCB CONNECT A (See page 5-21) PCB MAIN (See page 5-20) PCB CONNECT B(See page 5-21) POWER-SUPPLY (See page 5-21) 5-15 .2.

5. Remove the Cover panel. Otherwise the Pin sensor may fall off. Remove the Cover platen (MFX-1350) or Cover ADF base (F-305). Disconnect the connector on the PCB PANEL 1.PCB PANEL 1 1. PCB PANEL 1 P50 Pin sensor LCD Cover panel Film harness 5-16 . (See page 5-7) 2. do not turn over the Cover panel. Disconnect the Film harness of the LCD. and then remove the PCB PANEL 1. and then release eight locking tabs. (See page 5-13) 3. Note: After removing the PCB PANEL 1. Remove six PCB PANEL 1 mounting screws. 4.

and then remove the Cover lens. Open the Cover platen. Cover contact Cover lens Snap fit 4. and four locking tabs. and then the PCB INVERTER. 2. PCB INVERTER CN1 CN2 5-17 .PCB INVERTER (MFX-1350) 1. Remove two Cover lens locking snap fits. then disconnect two connectors and two locking tabs. 3. and then remove the Cover contact. then release three locking tabs. Remove two Cover contact mounting screws. Remove the PCB INVERTER mounting screw.

PCB INVERTER (F-305) 1. then disconnect two connectors and two locking tabs. PCB INVERTER CN1 CN2 5-18 . (See page 5-13) 3. Remove the Cover lens. (See page 5-19) 4. Remove the PCB INVERTER mounting screw. Remove the Cover top PPF. (See page 5-7) 2. and then the PCB INVERTER. Remove the Cover ADF base.

LAMP (MFX-1350) 1. Remove the Cover contact. Remove the Cover ADF base. (See page 5-19) 3. Release two locking tabs and two snap fits. 5. and then remove the LAMP. 4. (See page 5-17) 2. Release two locking tabs and two snap fits. Remove the Cover lens. (See page 5-13) 3. 4. (See page 5-7) 2. Cover lens Lamp Snap fit Case lamp Snap fit CN2 Frame scanner 5-19 . 5. Lift the front of the Frame scanner. and then remove the LAMP. Remove the Cover top PPF. Lift the front of the Frame scanner. Disconnect the connector for the Lamp on the PCB INVERTER. Remove the Cover lens. 6. Lamp Case lamp Snap fit Frame scanner CN2 LAMP (F-305) 1. Disconnect the connector for the Lamp on the PCB INVERTER.

and then remove the Cover shield. When the PCB MAIN is replaced. Remove the Cover connect and disconnect the connector.PCB MAIN 1. CCD PANEL NCU P5 P8C P19 PCB MAIN P8C P3 PSU P91 P92 Note: Turning parameters for Color(R. 5-20 .G. Remove the Plate main B mounting screws. 4. 3. Cover option Cover shield Plate main B 5. and then remove PCB MAIN. and then remove the Plate main B. and then remove the Cover option. the EEPROM on malfunction PCB should be replaced to the new PCB. Disconnect all connectors on the PCB MAIN. Remove six PCB MAIN mounting screws. 6.B) and Gray mode are stored in the EEPROM(IC42). (See page 5-6) 2. Remove four Cover shield mounting screws. Remove two Cover option mounting screws.

Separate the PCB CONNECT B. 3.PCB CONNECT B 1. Disconnect seven connectors on the POWER-SUPPLY. 4. (See page 5-20) 2. Remove the PCB MAIN. Remove the PCB MAIN. 5. PCB MAIN PCB CONNECT B PCB CONNECT A / POWER-SUPPLY 1. PCB CONNECT A POWER-SUPPLY 5-21 . Disconnect seven connectors on the PCB CONNECT A. and then remove the PCB CONNECT A. Remove three POWER-SUPPLY mounting screw. (See page 5-20) 2. and then remove the POWER-SUPPLY. Remove four PCB CONNECT A mounting screws.

Remove the harness from cord clamp. Open the Cover front. Remove four PCB NCU mounting screws. Remove the Cover left mounting screw. Cover left 4. and then remove the Cover left. 6. Disconnect the connector and then remove the PCB NCU. (See page 5-20) 2. Cover front Clamp PCB NCU PCB PSU 5-22 .PCB PSU / PCB NCU 1. Disconnect two connectors. 7. Remove the PCB PSU. Remove the Cover option. 3. 8. 5.

and then remove the PCB CONNECT C. (See page 5-32) 2. PCB CONNECT C 5-23 .PCB CONNECT C 1. 4. Remove the Chassis FBS. Disconnect the connector and the Film harness. Remove the Tray exit paper. Remove two PCB CONNECT C mounting screws. (See page 5-12) 3.

be careful not to lose the plastic ring. Shaft separator Roller separator Gear 40 0. Remove the Gear 40 0.2. Remove the Cover TX side B.3 SCANNING SECTION ROLLER SEPARATOR 1. Note: When removing the Roller separator.6B. 4. (See page 5-8) 2. Remove the Shaft separator and then remove the ROLLER SEPARATOR. Slide the bearing as shown below. 5. 3. Remove one plastic ring.6B Bearing 5-24 .5.

5 and two bearings.ROLLER FEED 1. Remove three Spring P earth mounting screws. Open the Guide inner B. 3.5 Guide inner A E-ring 5-25 . Remove the Guide inner A. (See page 5-35) 2. E-ring Gear 27 0. and then remove the Spring P earth. Remove two E-rings and then remove the Gear 27 0. Guide inner A Guide outer Guide inner B Ground wire Spring P earth 4.

Lift the Roller feed and slide out as shown below. Roller feed Roller feed 5-26 . Then remove the ROLLER FEED.5.

5 ONE WAY and one bearing. E-ring Gear 27 0. (See page 5-255-25) 3. Remove two E-rings and then remove the Gear 27 0. Slide out the ROLLER EXIT. Roller exit 5-27 . (See page 5-35) 2 Remove the Spring P earth.ROLLER EXIT 1. Open the Guide inner B.5 ONE WAY Roller exit Guide inner B E-ring 5. Remove the Guide inner A. 4.

(See page 5-7) 2. Remove the belt from the Frame scanner. 5.FRAME SCANNER (MFX-1350) 1. Disconnect the Flat harness on the Frame scanner. 7. Flat harness Core P2 P1 Frame scanner PCB CCD 6. Remove Cover platen. Remove the Cover lens. Release two locking tabs. (See page 5-13) 3. (See page 5-17) 4. and then remove the Core. Remove the Cover top. Shaft guide Belt Belt Frame scanner Flat harness 5-28 . Disconnect the Flat harness from the connector P1 on the PCB CCD.

Disconnect the Flat harness from the connector P1 on the PCB CCD. Remove the Cover ADF base. Then remove the FRAME SCANNER. 5. and then remove the Core. Slide out the Shaft guide as shown below. (See page 5-13) 3. Remove the Cover top PPF. (See page 5-7) 2. Release two locking tabs. Flat harness Core P2 P1 Frame scanner CCD PCB 5-29 . (See page 5-18) 4. Shaft guide Frame scanner FRAME SCANNER (F-305) 1. Remove the Cover lens.8.

6. Remove two Bracket scanner B mounting screws. 8. Lift the front of the Frame scanner. and then remove the Bracket scanner B. Then remove the FRAME SCANNER. Frame scanner Flat harness 7. and then disconnect the Flat harness on the Frame scanner. Bracket scanner B Frame scanner 5-30 . Slide out the Bracket scanner B as shown below.

(See page 5-13) 3.HOME SENSOR (HS) (MFX-1350 only) 1. Remove the Cover platen. (See page 5-28) 4. Remove the Cover top. Sensor stopper P2 Home sensor 5-31 . 5. (See page 5-7) 2. Remove the Frame scanner. Remove the tab. Remove the Sensor stopper. and then remove the HOME SENSOR.

(See page 5-20) 4. Cover platen Chassis FBS Ground wire Cover jam access Cover back 5-32 . Remove two Cover back mounting screws. 7. and then remove the CHASSIS FBS. Disconnect three connectors and remove the Ground wire. Open the Cover jam access. 6.CHASSIS FBS 1. (See page 5-20) 3. 5. (See page 5-6) 2. Remove the Cover option. Remove seven Chassis FBS mounting screws. and then remove Cover back. Remove the Cover shield. Remove the Cover connect.

(See page 5-8. 4. Remove the Cover TX side B.ADF MOTOR 1. 5-9) 2. Disconnect the connector. Cut the Cable tie. ADF motor Bracket motor ADF Cable tie 5 Remove two ADF motor mounting screw. and then remove the ADF MOTOR. Remove the three Bracket motor ADF mounting screw. and then remove the Bracket motor ADF. ADF motor Bracket motor ADF 5-33 . 3.

5. TXIL Gear 24/47 Gear 18/55 4. (See page 5-33) 3. Remove the bracket motor ADF. Disconnect the connector and remove the SENSOR TXIL. TXIL Cable tie 5-34 . Remove the Gear 18/55 and the Gear 24/47. (See page 5-8. Cut the Cable tie.Sensor TXIL 1. Remove the cover TX side B. 5-9) 2.

Remove the Cover TX side B. Remove two Guide inner A mounting screw and the tab. 5-9) 3.GUIDE INNER A 1. and then remove the GUIDE INNER A. Remove the Ground wire as shown below. (See page 5-10. (See page 5-8. Remove the Guide inner A. Remove the Cover TX side B. Remove the Cover TX side F. 4. 5-11) 2. (See page 5-10. (See page 5-85-7. 5. 5-9) 3. Remove the GUIDE OUTER. Remove the Cover TX side F. Ground wire Guide inner A APS bracket GUIDE OUTER 1. Remove two APS bracket mounting screw and then remove the APS bracket. 5-11) 2. Guide inner A Guide outer 5-35 . 4.

PAD SEPARATOR 1. 4. 5-9) 2. (See page 5-8. Cover separator Pad separator 5-36 . Remove the Cover TX side B. and then remove the Cover separator. Release two locking tabs. Remove the Roller separator. Remove the PAD SEPARATOR. (See page 5-24) 3.

11.5 [2] Gear 18/55 5-37 . and then remove [5] the Gear 27 0. (See page 5-35) 6. Remove the Cover TX side F. Remove the Cover TX side B. (See page 5-10. Remove one E-ring. Remove the Guide inner A. 5-11) 2.5. (See page 5-38) 5.5. 9.5 ONEWAY ANA03 [4] Gear 59 0. Remove the Bracket motor ADF. 5-9) 3.6B [6] Gear 27 0. 7. [1] Remove the Gear 24/47. (See page 5-33) 4.5 [1] Gear 24/47 [4] Gear 59 0.5 ONEWAY. [3] Gear 40 0. Remove the APS bracket. [2] Remove the Gear 18/55. (See page 5-8. 10. 8. and then remove [6] the Gear 27 0.5 ANA04 [5] Gear 27 0. [3] Remove the Gear 40 0. Remove one E-ring.6B.ADF DRIVE GEARS 1. [4] Remove two Gear 59 0.

Disconnect the connector on the APS and remove the SENSOR (APS). (See page 5-35) 6. Remove the Bracket motor ADF mounting screw. Remove two APS bracket mounting screws. Remove the Guide inner A. Guide inner A APS APS bracket 5-38 . (See pages 5-8. Remove the Cover TX side B. (See page 5-33) 4. Remove the Cover TX side F. 5-11) 2. 5.ADF PERMIT SENSOR (APS) 1. (See pages 5-10. and then remove the APS bracket. 5-9) 3.

Note: When reattaching the parts. then remove the DS1. Remove the DS1 mounting screw and disconnect the connector on the DS1. Remove the Guide inner A. Loosen the Guide inner B mounting screw (A) and open the Guide inner B. 4. Remove the DS2 mounting screw and disconnect the connector on the DS2. 3. close the Guide inner B first and then tighten up the mounting screw (A). (See page 5-35) 2.SENSOR DS1/DS2 1. then remove the DS2. DS2 DS1 (A) Guide inner B 5-39 .

Remove the Cover top. Remove two FBS motor mounting screw and disconnect the harness.FBS MOTOR (MFX-1350 only) 1. FBS Motor P83 5-40 . and then remove the Bracket motor FBS. Remove three Bracket motor FBS mounting screws. and then remove the FBS MOTOR. 4. Slide the Bracket motor FBS. and then remove the belt. (See page 5-13) 3. and then remove the spring C FG. Remove the Spring C tension. Bracket motor FBS Spring C Tension 7. Remove the Shaft guide. Remove the Cover platen. (See page 5-7) 2. 5. Bracket motor FBS Spring C FG Shaft guide Belt 6.

Temporarily tighten the three Bracket motor FBS screws. FBS motor Belt 5-41 . Tighten up the above three screws. 3. 2.ASSEMBLING THE FBS MOTOR (MFX-1350 only) 1. Attach the belt in position.

Cut the Cable tie. (See page 5-20) 2. Remove the Cover back. Remove the Cover shield. Remove the Bracket solenoid mounting screw. and then remove the SOLENOID. (See page 5-32) 4. Clutch(MG) Clutch(MG) 5-42 .2. (See page 5-32) 4. Remove the Cover option. Remove two plastic rings.5. (See page 5-20) 2. 6. Remove the Cover shield. and then remove the Bracket solenoid. and disconnect the connector. 5. Remove the Cover back. (See page 5-20) 3. Disconnect the connector of Clutch (MG).4 PRINTER SECTION SOLENOID 1. 5. Remove the Solenoid mounting screw. Solenoid Bracket solenoid Cable tie CLUTCH (MG) 1. Remove the Cover option. and then remove the CLUTCH (MG). (See page 5-20) 3.

(See page 5-20) 2. Remove the Cover shield. and then remove the RX MOTOR. (See page 5-32) 4. Remove two Motor duplex mounting screws and disconnect the connector.RX MOTOR 1. Motor duplex 5-43 . (See page 5-20) 3. Remove four RX motor mounting screws and disconnect the connector. Remove the Cover back. (See page 5-32) 4. Remove the Cover shield. (See page 5-20) 2. RX motor MOTOR DUPLEX 1. Remove the Cover option. and then remove the MOTOR DUPLEX. Remove the Cover back. (See page 5-20) 3. Remove the Cover option.

and then remove the Ground wire. Remove three Stay pickup mounting screw. Remove the Cover option. Remove the SPRING CLUTCH.SPRING CLUTCH 1. Remove the Cover back. (See page 5-32) 4. (See page 5-20) 3. (See page 5-20) 2. Remove the Cover shield. and then remove the stay pickup. Remove two Ground wire mounting screw. Stay pickup Spring clutch Ground wire Ground wire 5-44 . 5. 6.

Remove three Ground wires. and then pull out the Frame drive.FRAME DRIVE GEARS 1. and disconnect the connector on RX motor. [1] Remove the Gear 73H/27H. 5. Remove the Cover option. Remove the Cover back. Clamp Frame drive Ground wire Ground wire 8. (See page 5-20) 2. Remove the Cover shield. 10. Remove the harness from two clamps. (See page 5-32) 4. Frame drive [1] Gear 73H/23H [3] Gear 61H [2] Gear 54H/28H 5-45 . [2] Remove the Gear 54H/28H. 9. 6. Remove five Frame drive mounting screws. Remove the FRAME DRIVE. (See page 5-20) 3. 7. [3] Remove the Gear 61H.

14. [10] Remove the Gear 41/21. [7] Remove the Gear 21. 20. [6] Remove the Gear 20. 23. Remove the Clutch (MG). 15. 21.8.8 [10] Gear 41/21 5-46 . 19. 18. [11] Remove the Gear 33H/37. [12] Remove the Gear 22. [6] Gear 20 [7] Gear 21 [5] Gear 35/19 [4] Gear 59H/19 [13] Gear 57H/27H [12] Gear 22 [11] Gear 33H/37 [9] Gear 34 [8] Gear 34 0. (See page 5-42) 13. Remove the Spring clutch. (See page 5-44) 12. 17. [8] Remove the Gear 34 0. Remove the Motor duplex. [9] Remove the Gear 34 (D88-30160-61).11. 16. [5] Remove the Gear 35/19. [13] Remove the Gear 57H/27H. 22. [4] Remove the Gear 59H/19.

2. Disconnect the connector of PCB ERS lamp. and then the Cover bracket transfer and Guide paper transfer A. Open the Cover jam access. Knob lock JAC Guide inner PCB ERS lamp Cover jam access 5. Remove two Guide paper transfer A mounting screws. Remove the Knob lock JAC. 4.ROLLER TRANSFER 1. Cover bracket transfer Guide paper transfer A Sheet transfer 5-47 . Remove four Guide inner mounting screws. and then remove the Guide inner. 3.

7. and then remove the Gear 16H-0. 5. Remove the Knob lock JAC. 2. Remove two E-rings. Remove the two Bracket transfer tabs from the back of the Guide inner. (See page 5-47) 3. Hold the Bearing press’s.6. Bearing press ANB03 4) Bearing Roller register ANB03 4) Bearing press Gear 16H-0.8. Bracket transfer Roller transfer ANA05 Bracket transfer ROLLER REGISTER 1.8 Bearing press Gear 16H-0. Remove the ROLLER TRANSFER. and slide and remove the ROLLER REGISTER. (See page 5-47) 4. Remove the Guide inner.8 5-48 . Open the Cover jam access.

2. Feeler MP TRAYS Sensor stopper Chassis cassette 2nd 5-49 . Remove the Cover jam access. 3.SENSOR TRAYS 1. Separate the Chassis cassette 2nd from the body. and remove the Sensor stopper from behind. Remove the Sensor TRAYS while pulling up the Feeler MP.

(See page 5-32) 2. Remove the Cover shield. and then remove the Frame upper. and then remove the Sensor JAMC1. and then remove the Cover Switch. Remove five Frame upper mounting screws. (See page 5-32)_CHASSIS_FBS 4. Release the tab. Ground wire Ground wire Frame upper Cover Switch 5-50 . (See page 5-20) 3. Disconnect the connector of Sensor interlock. JAMC1 Sensor stopper COVER SWITCH 1. Open the Cover jam access. (See page 5-20) 2. 3. Remove the Cover option. Remove the Cover back. 4. 5. Remove the Chassis FBS. Open the Cover jam access.SENSOR JAMC1 1.

3. Remove the Cover jam access. and then remove the SENSOR PSS. Remove the Guide press B mounting screw. 5. Remove the Cover jam access. Release the tab. Slide the ROLLER PICKUP MP to the left and remove. 4. 2. and then remove Guide press B while pulling up the Feeler PSS. 3.SENSOR PSS 1. Remove the Clutch (MG) (See page 5-42) 2. Guide press B Feeler PSS Sensor stopper Sensor PSS ROLLER PICKUP MP / PAD PRESSURE MP 1. Remove two E-rings. Guide paper MPDUP Clutch(MG) E-ring E-ring MP pressure Roller pickup MP 5-51 . Lift the Guide paper MPDUP and press down the MP pressure.

Remove the Ground wire and four Printer fuser mounting screws. 3. Printer fuser Ground wire 5-52 . Remove the PAD PRESSURE MP. and then remove the harness. align the notch with the counterpart on the body. Remove the PRINTER FUSER. Note: When reattaching the Pad pressure MP. 2. Open the Cover jam access.6. Pad pressure MP Guide paper MPDUP PRINTER FUSER 1.

Remove the Sensor stopper and disconnect the connector. Ground wire Sensor DPS Ground wire Frame upper Sensor PDS Sensor stopper Sensor stopper ROLLER EXIT 1.SENSOR PDS / DPS Note: Sensor DPS is for duplex model only. Remove five Frame upper mounting screws. Remove the Frame upper. 1. (See page 5-32) 2. (See page 5-32) 2. Remove the Chassis FBS. 4. align its cutout with the cutout of the Frame upper’s holder. and then remove the BRG exit. Remove one E-ring. 3. Frame upper BRG Exit TX gear 20 E-ring BRG Exit Roller exit 5-53 . and then remove the Frame upper. and then remove the SENSOR PDS/DPS. Slide out the ROLLER EXIT. 3. Remove the Chassis FBS. Note: When reattaching the BRG exit.

Remove one plastic ring and bearing.ROLLER PICK UP (1st CST) / (2nd CST) 1. 2. Remove the PAD PRESSURE. Remove the Roller pick up. Release the roller tab from the shaft groove. Pull out the Cassette 1st. 2. Roller pick up E-ring Cassette 1st PAD PRESSURE (1st CST) / (2nd CST) 1. Pad pressure 5-54 . 3. and remove the ROLLER PICK UP.

PIECE COVER CST (1st CST Paper dust)
1. Pull out the Cassette 1st. 2. Remove two Piece cover CST mounting screws, and then remove the PIECE COVER CST. Note: Paper dust is collected in the Piece cover CST. When it is full, empty it.

Cassette 1st Piece cover CST

SENSOR JAMC2
1. Separate the Chassis 2nd from the Main frame. 2. Open the Cover JAC 2nd. 3. Remove the Sensor stopper and disconnect the connector, and then remove the Sensor JAMC2

Sensor stopper Chassis cassette 2nd JAMC2

Cover JAC 2nd

5-55

SENSOR PES2
1. Separate the Chassis cassette 2nd from the Main frame. 2. Pull out the Cassette 2nd. 3. Turn over the Chassis cassette 2nd. 4. Remove the Bracket sensor mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket sensor. 5. Remove the Sensor stopper and connector, and then remove the Sensor PES2.

Chassis cassette 2nd

PES2

Bracket sensor

Cassette 2nd Sensor stopper

ROLLER FEED 2ND (2nd CST)
1. Separate the Chassis cassette 2nd from the Main frame. 2. Remove two Guide paper 2nd CST mounting screws, and then remove the Guide paper 2nd CST. 3. Remove the Plate frame F mounting screw, and then remove the Plate frame F. 4. Remove the ROLLER FEED 2ND.

Guide paper 2nd CST

Chassis cassette 2nd

Roller feed 2nd

Plate frame F

5-56

PLATE FRAME B (2nd CST)
1. Separate the Chassis cassette 2nd from the Main frame. 2. Pull out the Cassette 2nd. 3. Remove the Roller feed 2ND. (See page 5-56) 4. Disconnect the connector of Solenoid. 5. Remove two Plate frame B mounting screws, and then remove the PLATE FRAME B.

Solenoid Ground wire Plate frame B

Chassis 2nd

5-57

PLATE FRAME B GEARS (2nd CST)
1. Separate the Chassis cassette 2nd from the Main frame. 2. Pull out the Cassette 2nd. 3. Remove the Roller feed 2nd. (See page 5-56) 4. Remove the Plate frame B. (See page 5-57) 5. Remove one E-ring. 6. Remove the Spring C tracking. 7. Remove the Plate tracking. 8. Remove the Gear 48. 9. Remove one E-ring and remove the Shaft tracking, and then remove the Gear 34-0.8B. 10. Remove one E-ring, and then remove Gear 34-0.8C.

Shaft tracking Spring C tracking Plate frame B Gear 34-0.8B E-ring

Plate tracking E-ring Gear 34-0.8C E-ring Gear 48

5-58

SPRING CLUTCH (2nd CST)
1. Separate the Chassis cassette 2nd from the Main frame. 2. Pull out the Cassette 2nd. 3. Remove the Roller feed 2ND. (See page 5-56) 4. Remove the Plate frame B. (See page 5-57) 5. Remove three Holder gear 2ND mounting screws, and then remove the Holder gear 2ND. 6. Remove the SPRING CLUTCH.

Plate frame B

Spring clutch Holder gear 2ND

SOLENOID (2nd CST)
1. Separate the Chassis cassette 2nd from the Main frame. 2. Pull out the Cassette 2nd. 3. Remove the Roller feed 2ND. (See page 5-56) 4. Remove the Plate frame B. (See page 5-57) 5. Remove the Solenoid mounting screw, and then remove the SOLENOID.

Solenoid

Plate frame B

5-59

SENSOR OPEN2
1. Separate the Chassis cassette 2nd from the Main frame. 2. Pull out the Cassette 2nd. 3. Remove the Roller feed 2ND. (See page 5-56) 4. Remove the Plate frame B. (See page 5-57) 5. Release the tab, and then remove the Sensor OPEN2.

Chassis 2nd

Sensor stopper

OPEN2

5-60

Belt duplex Gear 20/25P Bearing E-ring E-ring Gear 20/25P Bearing E-rings Bearing 5-61 . and then remove the Guide upper JAC. Remove the Cover jam access. Remove two Guide upper JAC mounting screws. Guide upper JAC Cover jam access 4.ROLLER FEED DUPLEX A 1. and then remove the Gear 20/25P. Remove four E-rings. Remove the Belt duplex from the Gear 20/25P. 5. 2. Remove the Guide inner. (See page 5-47) 3.

and slide out the ROLLER FEED DUPLEX A.6. Remove one bearing. Roller feed duplex A Bearing 5-62 .

Pull out the Cassette 1st. Cover jam access Drum cartridge 5-63 . Knob pressure Toner cartridge Cassette 1st 5. 6. Pull out Drum cartridge. 2 (TS1. Remove the Cover front. Open the Cover jam access.TONER SENSOR 1. 4. Release the Knob pressure. 3. Pull out the Toner cartridge. (See page 5-12) 2. TS2) 1.

Release the locking tab. Remove the TS2 mounting screw. and then remove the TS2 TS 2 Bracket toner sensor B 5-64 .7. and then remove the Bracket toner sensor B. Bracket toner sensor B 8.

TS1 Bracket toner sensor A 5-65 . Bracket toner sensor A 10. and then remove the TS1. Remove the TS1 mounting screw.9. and then remove the Bracket toner sensor A. Release the locking tab.

SENSOR PES1 1. 2. Pull out the Cassette 1st. PES1 Bracket sensor Sensor stopper 5-66 . and then remove the PES1. Bracket sensor 3. Remove the Sensor stopper and connector. Using a short screwdriver. remove the Bracket sensor from the bottom (back) of the body.

Remove the Cover option. (See page 5-32) 4. (See page 5-20) 3. Remove the Cover back. Remove the Sensor stopper. (See page 5-20) 2. Sensor stopper OPEN1 5-67 . and then remove the Sensor OPEN1.SENSOR OPEN1 1. Disconnect the connector of Sensor. 5. Remove the Cover shield.

Open the Cover front. (See page 5-32) 2. Ground wire Stay LED Film harness Ground wire 10. and then remove the Stay LED. 7. Remove the Chassis FBS. Remove two Stay LED mounting screws. Remove the Drum cartridge and the case DEV. Ground wire LED Ground wire Film harness 5-68 . 5.LED 1. Remove the LED. 9. Note: When connecting the Film harness. 3. Remove two Ground wires. Disconnect the Film harness of the PCB CONNECT C. Remove the Cover left. Remove the Tray paper exit. Open the Cover jam access. 8. 4. exactly adjust the Contact side. 6.

3 mm downward.3” for Horizontal registration. 7.3 mm upward. the printing image moves 12. You can adjust between ”–12.5. When you set “+12.7 mm” and “+12.3.0 6. If you set “–12. 3. adjust printer position for each cassette. Adjust the printer registration: For example: When you set “+12.7) +00.2 Printer registration mode This mode adjusts the print registration for each paper source. Adjust the scan position and zoom for ADF and FBS.3”.3 mm rightward. 3. If you set “”–12. <3>. Adjust the printer registration of the first cassette. Press < > or < > to select “Vertical registration” or “Horizontal registration”. Cassette 1 / /Enter 2. the printing image moves 12. To return to the standby. the printing image moves 12.3”.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment 1.3 mm leftward.3” for Vertical registration. <*>. Press <Menu>. press <Reset>. 5.7 mm”.0-12. <4>. After performing step1 and 2. 8. the value entered by the machine parameter will also be overwritten. 1. Press <Enter>. Press <Enter>. Note: If you adjust the printer registration using this mode.3 Adjustment 5. Vertical Regi / /Enter 4. 5. 5-69 . Vertical Regi (00. the printing image moves 12. 2.3. Press < > or < > to select the paper source you want to adjust. Press <Enter> to save the settings.

241 Bypass Tray:Machine parameter 187. (bit 0. <0>. < > . (Vertical) Machine Parameter 220 to 228 –– Adjust the top margin. If width A falls outside the specified range. < >. <Enter>) 4. 248 Machine Parameter 180 to 188 –– Adjust the start point to printing.7 (mm) (0. 6. Machine Parameter 240 to 248 –– Adjust the bottom margin 5-70 . 220 Machine parameter: 240 Setting Range 0 to 12. After you have finished the adjustment. 240 Cassette 2: Machine parameter 181.1 mm step) Adjustment procedure 1.Printer registration (top) A A Test pattern H Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range. Printout the test pattern H : Ladder.7 (mm) (0. <*>. <*>. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. Load legal (for US version) or A4 (for European version) size paper to the cassette or tray you want to adjust. Check width A on the test pattern H: Ladder meets the specifications.8 to 12. 227. Important: The setting you have entered in Printer registration mode is reflected in the following Machine parameters. <Enter>. 5. <9>. and then adjust the “Vertical Registration”. 220. <4>. increase value. 7. Select “Vertical Regi ”. < >. If the width A is shorter than the standard. perform following steps to make the adjustment. 221. 228. 247 Duplex Unit: Machine parameter 188. <3> and then select the cassette. < >. you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52. (Press <Menu>.5 (mm) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter: 180. Standard 10 ± 1.1 mm step) -12. 1 0) 3. Cassette 1: Machine parameter 180. 2. you changed in step 1.” press <Menu>. If the width A is longer than the standard. To use the “Printer registration mode. decrease value.

If width A falls outside the specified range.8 (mm) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter: 100. If the width A is longer than the standard. <Enter>) 4. 1 0) 3.8 to 12. < >. 148. <Enter>. < >. <*>. <4>. 161 Bypass Tray :Machine parameter 107. Standard 10 ± 1. <9>. 5. you changed in step 1. 168 5-71 .Printer registration (side) A A Test pattern H Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range. Check width A on the test pattern H: Ladder meets the specifications. Cassette1 : Machine parameter 100. perform following steps to make the adjustment. <*>. Important: The setting you have entered in Printer registration mode is reflected in the following Machine parameters. 160 Setting Range –12. you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52. 167 Duplex Unit: Machine parameter 108. < >. decrease value. 6. <0>. Select “Vertical Regi ”. (Press <Menu>. 140. 147. and then adjust the “Vertical Registration”. 140. After you have finished the adjustment.6773 mm step) Adjustment procedure 1. < >. 160 Cassette2 : Machine parameter 101. <3> and then select the cassette. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. If the width A is shorter than the standard. increase value. To use the “Printer registration mode.” press <Menu>. 141. 2.7 (mm) (0. 7. Load legal (for US version) or A4 (for European version) size paper to the cassette or tray you want to adjust. Printout the test pattern H: Ladder. (bit 0.

3.3 Zoom adjustment FBS zoom adjustment (Vertical) A Note: This is a sample for adjustment using a particular test chart. 5. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference. Place a Test Chart on the document glass. increase value.5 % (0. perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 2. The difference should be within ± 1. Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the first cassette have been made. Load legal (for US version) or A4 (for European version) size paper to the first cassette. If length A falls outside the specified range. decrease value.5. 5-72 .5 to 1. <0>) 6. If length A is shorter than the standard. Make two copies on paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.1 % step) Adjustment procedure 1. <0>. If length A is longer than the standard.0 % Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:017 Setting Range – 1. Adjust so that the following specifications are satisfied with the length of A on the test chart. <*>. Zoom ratio 100 % Standard ± 1. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 017 meets the specification. Enter Machine Parameter mode.3. 4. (Press <Menu>.0% of the actual length of A on the test chart.

Adjust so that the following specification satisfies the length of A on the test chart. Load legal (for US version) or A4 (for European version) size paper to the first cassette. <0>) 6. If the length A is longer than the standard. 5.0 % of the actual length of A on the test chart. decrease value. Enter Machine Parameter mode. <*>.5 % (0. If the length A is shorter than the standard.0 % Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:016 Setting Range – 1. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 016 to meet the specification. <0>. Place a Test Chart on the document glass.5 to 1. Make two copies on paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. If length A falls outside the specified range. 2. perform the following steps to make the adjustment. The difference should be within ± 1. increase value. 4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.FBS zoom adjustment (Horizontal) A Note: This is a sample for adjustment using a particular test chart. Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette have been made. Zoom ratio 100 % Standard ± 1. 5-73 . (Press <Menu>. 3.1 % step) Adjustment procedure 1.

Load legal (for US version) or A4 (for European version) size paper to the first cassette. 5. increase value. If the length A is shorter than the standard.) 6.5 % (0. perform the following steps to make the adjustment. Zoom ratio 100 % Standard ± 1.1 % step) Adjustment procedure 1. <0>.5 % Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:012 Setting Range – 1.0 % of the actual length of A on the test chart. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference. 2. <*>. If the length A is longer than the standard. Place a Test Chart on the ADF. Enter Machine Parameter mode. Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette have been made. The difference should be within ± 1. decrease value. <0>.ADF zoom adjustment (Vertical) A Note: This is a sample for adjustment using a particular test chart. If length A falls outside the specified range. 5-74 .5 to 1. 4. Make two copies on paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 012 meets the specification. (Press <Menu>. 3. Adjust so that the following specifications are satisfied with the length of A on the test chart.

4.5 to 1. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 011 to meet the specification. If length A falls outside the specified range. Enter Machine Parameter mode. If the length A is shorter than the standard. 5-75 . <0>) 6. 3.5 % Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:011 Setting Range – 1. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference. Load legal (for US version) or A4 (for European version) size paper to the first cassette.ADF zoom adjustment (Horizontal) A Note: This is a sample for adjustment using a particular test chart. increase value. <*>. Place a Test Chart on the ADF.5 % (0. Zoom ratio 100 % Standard ± 1. perform the following steps to make the adjustment. The difference should be within ± 1. Make two copies on paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. (Press <Menu>. decrease value. 2. Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette have been made. If the length A is longer than the standard.0 % of the actual length of A on the test chart. 5. Adjust so that the following specifications are satisfied with the length of A on the test chart.1 % step) Adjustment procedure 1. <0>.

5. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 018 to meet the specification.3. increase value. Load legal (for US version) or A4 (for European version) size paper to the 1st cassette. 4.4 Registration FBS registration (top) Edge of the paper A Test Chart No. Enter Machine Parameter mode. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A’) meets the specifications.2 (mm) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:018 Setting Range – 2. (Press <Menu>.70 ∼ 2. Place a Test Chart on the document glass. 5. decrease value. If the width A is longer than the standard. perform the following steps to make the adjustment. <0>) 6. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. If the difference falls outside the specified range.70 (mm) (0. <*>.2003-01 Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made. If the width A is shorter than the standard. 5-76 . 2. Standard 0 ± 2. <0>. 3.0212 mm step) Adjustment procedure 1.

5. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A’) meets the specifications. Enter Machine Parameter mode. <0>) 6. 4. <0>. perform the following steps to make the adjustment.76 ∼ 10. 2.0847 mm step) Adjustment procedure 1. 3. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. If the difference falls outside the specified range.6 (mm) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:015 Setting Range – 10.FBS registration (side) A Edge of the paper Test Chart No.76 (mm) (0. <*>. (Press <Menu>. Standard 0 ± 2. decrease value. Load legal (for US version) or A4 (for European version) size paper to the 1st cassette. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 015 to meet the specification. increase value. If the width A is longer than the standard. Place a Test Chart on the document glass. 5-77 . If the width A is shorter than the standard.2003-01 Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.

decrease value. If the difference falls outside the specified range. perform the following steps to make the adjustment. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.2 (mm) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:013 Setting Range –10. Load legal (for US version) or A4 (for European version) size paper to the 1st cassette. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 013 to meet the specification. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A’) meets the specifications. 3. 4. Place a Test Chart on the ADF. If the width A is longer than the standard.ADF registration (top) Edge of the paper A Test Chart No. <*>. Standard 0 ± 2.76 (mm) (0. Enter Machine Parameter mode.0847 mm step) Adjustment procedure 1.76∼10. increase value. <0>. 5.2003-01 Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette and ADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made. 5-78 . <0>) 6. If the width A is shorter than the standard. 2. (Press <Menu>.

3.2003-01 Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette and ADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. <0>. If the difference falls outside the specified range.9 (mm) Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:010 Setting Range – 10. Standard 0 ± 2. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A’) meets the specifications. If the width A is shorter than the standard. Load legal (for US version) or A4 (for European version) size paper to the 1st cassette. 2.ADF registration (side) A Edge of the paper Test Chart No. Enter Machine Parameter mode. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 010 to meet the specification. <*>. Place a Test Chart on the ADF.76 ∼ 10. increase value. (Press <Menu>. 5. 4. perform the following steps to make the adjustment. If the width A is longer than the standard.0847 mm step) Adjustment procedure 1. 5-79 . <0>) 6. decrease value.76 (mm) (0.

Remove the Cover separator.3. 2. (See page 5-36) Cover separator Roller separator Rotate direction Clockwise Counterclockwise Separation pressure Up Down 5-80 . 3.5 Separation Pressure adjustment 1. Pick up the Roller separator. Open the Guide outer.5.

2. Peel the Cover scanner off the back of the Frame scanner.6 Cleaning the Mirror A. For F-305 1. 3. (See page 5-7) 2. Remove the Cover contact. B and C For MFX-1350 1. Remove the Cover lens.3. Now the mirrors B are accessible. (See page 5-17) 2. 1. Clean mirrors. Now the mirrors A and C are accessible. Remove the Cover top PPF. Mirror A Mirror B Mirror C Cover scanner 5-81 . Clean mirrors A and C. (See page 5-13) 3.5. Lift the front of the Frame scanner and remove the Cover lens and Case lamp. Remove the Cover ADF base.

5. Peel the separator off the double-coated tape of the Sheet document press. Cover top 1mm 1mm Cover contact A Sheet document press 5-82 . 3. 2. on the Pane. with the tape upward. 4. Close the Cover platen.7 Applying the Sheet Document Press (MFX-1350 only) 1.5. Open the Cover platen. Place the Sheet document press. Make sure the press edge is 1 mm away from the document reference position of the Cover contact.3.

..... Holding the memory module only by the edges....... Memory module (32 MB)... Plug the power cord and turn the machine on. 5..1 Installation 1. 4.. 2) Unplug the harness that is going through the connect cover... 2. gently but firmly set the memory module to the memory slot (P1 connector)... 4) Remove five screws and the shield cover.. Packaging contents: 1. 1) Remove one screw and the connect cover...... and <Enter>.......... 6.....Section 6 Options CAUTION: This installation should be done by an authorized Muratec technician. Remove the covers.. 3) Remove two screws and the option cover.. <*>... Initialize the memory module by pressing <Menu>. Note: This setting (“DRAM clear”) will erase all of stored documents in the machine’s memory..1 Memory Upgrade An optional 32 MB document memory upgrade is available. 6-1 . <1>. then push it until it snaps.. Connect cover Shield cover Option cover 3.. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.. <6>..

<0>. <Enter> to see the memory amount becomes 40960 KB (40 MB). 3) Enter RAM check area by number. <3>. 1) Press <Menu>. <5>. 2) Use the numeric keys and one-touch keys [01] through [06] to enter Hex code (00 to FF). and press <Start>. Press <Reset> to go back to the standby mode. <1>. 5) The machine shows the checked result. Turn the machine off. 9. <1>. 8. and then press <Enter>. Print the “Fax Settings List” by pressing <Menu>. 7. <1>. Reattach the covers and the harness. <*>.6. then use the cursor key to select “DRAM Check”. (See table below) Press Check area 0 All DRAMs 1 The standard memory on the main control board 2 The first half of the 32MB Optional Memory PCB 3 The second half of the 32MB Optional Memory PCB 4) Press <Start>. 6-2 . Perform the memory test (“DRAM check”) by the following procedure.

Connect cover Shield cover Option cover 3......... 6-3 ............ Slide the harness through the machine and attach the connector (P93).. Set the machine on top of the optional cassette...................... Second cassette back cover..... Screws ............... Remove the covers.......... 2) Unplug the harness that is going through the connect cover.... Connect the backside of the machine using two screws................. 3) Remove the two screws and the option cover..... 4) Remove the five screws and the shield cover.......... 1) Remove the connect cover screw and the cover.. Note: Make sure the machine is lined-up with the second cassette before you attempt to set the machine down.. Paper size label .. Optional paper cassette......... Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.......6......................5 4.... 6... 5.1 2.. 4... Attach the backside of the second cassette using one screw....2 Second paper cassette Packaging contents: 1.................1 3..... 2.1 Installation 1.

<2>.7. Apply the correct paper size label to the cassette. 1st Cassette :A4 / /Enter 1st Cassette :Ltr / /Enter 10. Open the first cassette and attach both screws both ends using two screws.Press the cursor key to select the paper size. 6-4 . US version: Letter. <Enter>. Press <Menu>. 13. Legal. <1>. <0>. F4. Reattach the covers and the harness. 9. Half-letter European version: A4. <1>. 8. The following sizes are available. Press <Reset> to exit. Press <Enter> to go to the second cassette setting. 2nd Cassette :A4 / /Enter 2nd Cassette :Ltr / /Enter 11. A5 12. Press <Enter>. 14.

... Relay cable ........... 2...... Screw .. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.........1 2...... Gently punch out the panel on the back cover.... Packaging contents: 1....1 Installation 1........ Option cover 6-5 .........999 pages............ 2) Unplug the harness that is going through the connect cover.... 4) Remove the five screws and the shield cover. If more pages are printed. 3) Remove the two screws and the option cover..... the counter resets to zero and begins counting the new pages from that point.. Remove the covers............6..........3 Page Counter The mechanical counter shows the total number of pages the machine prints................1 3............ 5) Remove the two screws and the back cover............ 1) Remove the connect cover screw and the cover....... Note: This device counts up to 999...... Mechanical counter .... Back cover Connect cover Shield cover 3..............

Note: When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. Be sure that wires are not caught when reattaching the covers. Fasten the counter to the machine frame using a screw. Reattach the covers and the harness. 5.4. 6-6 . 6. Attach the other end of the relay cable to the counter cable. The counter will now count the number of pages printed. P94 Connection board B Relay cable Counter 7. be sure to ground your body. Connect the relay cable to the P94 connector on connection board B.

..... Remove the covers..... Connect cover Shield cover Option cover 3............. 1) Remove the connect cover screw and the cover............... CD . 2.......... PCL printer board .......................1 Note: Two screws are included.. 4) Remove the five screws and the shield cover.....2 3.. *Use the enclosed CD to install the printer drivers...... 4..4 PCL printer controller Packaging contents: 1.. Spacers...... Screw ..... Installation 1................ Connect the ADF cable to the connector on the PCB bracket.... 6-7 ...... 2) Unplug the harness that is going through the connect cover.. Turn the power off and unplug the power cord. 8..................... Attach two spacers to the Main PCB...6. 5. Attach the left side of the PCL printer board using one screw....... Reattach the shield cover and the option cover... Reattach the connect cover.................................. Attach the PCL printer board to the machine and connect the cable to the P82 connector.......................... 6... 3) Remove the two screws and the option cover.............. but only one is required for installation. 7...1 2.....2 4.............

.....1 3.............. 6-8 ...4 5.... 3) Remove the two screws and the option cover............. Remove the left cover screw.......6.... Label .......... Secondary power supply . Spacer .1 Installation 1.... 4) Remove the five screws and the shield cover................. Network interface board ..2 6.................................. Remove the covers. Screws ........... 4.... Ferrite core ................................................... 1) Remove the connect cover screw and the cover....................... Remove the cover by releasing the two tabs on the upper side of the cover. 2......................................... 2) Unplug the harness that is going through the connect cover......... Connect cover Shield cover Option cover 3.....................5 Network interface board Packaging contents: 1.....1 2........ Turn the power off and unplug the power cord..........1 4.........................

Attach a spacer to the main board. Attach the secondary power supply. 10. 6. 8. Reattach the left cover using one screw. Release the cable that is taped to the main power supply and connect it to the secondary power supply. 9.5. Attach a ferrite core to the harness going out from PCB connect B so that the core comes near the PCB. 7. Attach the board using four screws. Attach the network board. 6-9 . 11.

Turn the power on. If a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server is not installed on your network. NET WO RK 17. <Enter>.12. DHCP Setting :Off / /Enter 6-10 . 13. Reattach the covers and the harness. <1>. DHCP Setting :On / /Enter 19. 14. Attach the NETWORK label. <1>. Press <Menu>. Wind the ferrite core around the LAN cable. 18. 16. Connect the LAN cable. the installation is over. proceed to step 18. 15. Press < > and <Enter>. <6>. If a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server is installed on your network. Use the nippers to carefully punch out the panel on the option cover.

24. 23.20. press <Reset > to return to standby. Press <Enter>. Press <Enter>. change the subnet mask. 22. If necessary. IP Address 192.168. Use numeric keys to enter the IP address. *Use the PCL print controller enclosed printer driver CD to install the printer drivers. 1. Turn off the machine. 10 21. 6-11 . and after two or more seconds turn it on again. For now. The machine will show other network settings.

................1 4..............1 (1) (2) (3) (4) LINE2 (5) (6) (7) (8) Note: The inclusion of the telephone line cable varies according to countries............. Installation 1................................................... Telephone line cable...............2 6......................................................6................... Connect cover Shield cover 3..... Screw B .. 1) Remove the connect cover screw and the cover...... 2) Unplug the harness that is going through the connect cover.................... 2......... Spacers ..............................4 8...................1 9............... Screw A ...........................6 Second phone line kit Packaging contents: 1......... Option cover 6-12 ......................................................1 3.....4 5. Label ........................... Remove the covers.......1 2. 4) Remove the five screws and the shield cover................... Operation manual ......... Ferrite core ....... 3) Remove the two screws and the option cover..... NCU PCB .. Turn the power off and unplug the power cord...................Use the nippers to carefully punch out the panel on the option cover............2 7...................... Modem PCB .

Attach the “Line 2” label above the plug. 8. 5. Clamp the harness to the NCU PCB’s bracket. Attach the NCU PCB onto the Main PCB using four screws. Wind the telephone line around the ferrite core and connect it to Line 2. 10. Reattach the covers and the harness. Attach two spacers to the main board. 9. (Screw A) 6. Connect the harness to the NCU PCB. (Screw B) 7. Attach the Modem PCB to the spacers and screw the right side of the board to the machine frame using two screws.4. LIN E2 PHON E1 PHON E2 LINE 6-13 . 11.

An external phone or an answering phone 6-14 .[GBR only] 12. If you want to attach an external phone or an answering machine to the second phone line kit. connect it to the socket as shown below.

......... 5..... 3) Remove the two screws and the option cover.................... Remove the covers.......... Setup Disk .... 2. Connect cover Shield cover Option cover 3............. 4.... Release the cable that is taped to the main power supply and connect it to the secondary power supply...... 1) Remove the connect cover screw and the cover..1 3.... Attach the secondary power supply...1 (Contains OfficeBridge programs and manuals) Installation 1.. OfficeBridge IC chip............6................ Remove the cover by releasing the two tabs on the upper side of the cover. 4) Remove the five screws and the shield cover. 6.7 OfficeBridge Expansion kit Packaging contents: 1..... 6-15 . 2) Unplug the harness that is going through the connect cover....... CompactFlash memory card ........ Turn the power off and unplug the power cord.......1 2. Remove the left cover screw..

Reattach the left cover using one screw. 9. Reattach the covers and the harness.Use the nippers to carefully punch out the panel on the option cover.7. Connect the LAN cable. 14. 11. Attach the OfficeBridge board. Attach the board using four screws. Attach a ferrite core to the harness going out from PCB connect B so that the core comes near the PCB. 12. Attach a spacer to the main board. Wind the ferrite core around the LAN cable. 13. 10. 8. 6-16 . 15.

Attach the NETWORK label.) Address Entry Setup the OfficeBridge Refer to the "Setup Guide" on the CD to setup OfficeBridge 1. 6-17 . The Setup Guide will open. Click [Manuals].16. NET WO RK 17. Insert the “Setup disk” CD into the CD-ROM drive of the computer. and then [Setup Guide]. 18. Attach the “ADDRESS ENTRY” label to the position as shown on the illustration below. (The “Address Entry” label is on the “Soft key label” supplied with the MFP. Reattach the covers and the harness. 2.